JP6761501B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned.

Further, conventionally, in a game machine having the above configuration, it is known that a player can select a desired effect from a plurality of types of effects provided in advance (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when any of the effects is selected by the player from the plurality of effects, control is performed to execute (output) the selected effects.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-187179

However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 merely executes the effect selected by the player, and does not change the game content.
By the way, conventionally, when the MAX bet operation of the player is enabled in a state where the number of medals stored in the credit is less than the predetermined maximum number of medals, the game is performed with less than the predetermined maximum number of medals, and the player It may be disadvantageous unintentionally.

The present invention has been made in order to meet the above demands, and an object of the present invention is that even if a MAX bet operation is performed in a state where the number of medals stored in the credit is less than a predetermined maximum number of medals. The purpose is to provide a game machine having a function that does not give a disadvantage to the player.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A storage game value updating means (for example, a credit function described later) for updating a stored game value value which is a game value (for example, a medal described later) deposited in a game machine main body (for example, an exterior body 2 described later).
Max betting means (for example, 3 cards described later) that can bet on the unit game in one operation with the maximum value of the game value (for example, 3 cards described later) that can be bet on the unit game in order to start the game from the stored game value. With the MAX bet button 21) described later,
After betting the game value for a unit game , a winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process described later) for determining the winning combination,
A variable display control means (for example, a reel stop control process described later) for stopping the variable display of a plurality of symbols according to the determination result of the winning combination determining means is provided.
The winning combination determining means can determine a special combination (for example, 2MB described later) whose determination result is carried over until the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed.
If the value of the stored game value is greater than 0 in the period for accepting a bet for starting a unit game in a situation where the special role has been carried over as a result of the determination, the value of the stored game value and the unit already When the total with the value of the game value bet on the game is a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value (for example, two cards described later), even if the max betting means is operated, the unit game is played. A game machine characterized by the fact that bets on game value are not made .

Further, in the game machine of the present invention,
The winning combination determining means can determine the special combination when the number of bets on the game value for the unit game is the predetermined value, and the number of bets on the game value for the unit game is the maximum value (for example,). , The special role cannot be determined in the case of (3 sheets described later).
When the number of bets of the game value for a unit game is the predetermined value, it is possible to display the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination and win the special combination, and the game value for the unit game. When the number of bets is the maximum value , it may be impossible to display the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination to win the special combination.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention,
The winning combination determining means can determine a specific combination (for example, 3 MB described later) when the number of bets on the game value for the unit game is the maximum value , and the number of bets on the game value for the unit game. Is the predetermined value, the specific combination cannot be determined, and
The specific combination is a combination in which the decision result is carried over until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed.
When the number of bets on the game value for a unit game is the maximum value, it is possible to display a combination of symbols corresponding to the specific combination and win the specific combination, and the game value for the unit game When the number of bets is the predetermined value, it may be impossible to display the combination of the symbols corresponding to the specific combination to win the specific combination.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, even if the MAX betting operation is performed in a state where the number of medals stored in the credit is less than the predetermined maximum number of medals, the player is not disadvantaged. Can be.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT game state of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (three pieces) for the general (RT0) gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (three pieces) for the game state between 2MB flags (RT1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (3 sheets hanging) for 3MB flag-to-3MB flag (RT2) game state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (two pieces) for the general (RT0) gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (two pieces) for the game state between 2MB flags (RT1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (two pieces) for 3MB flag (RT2) game state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 2MB gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 3MB gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the carry-over combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (in non-MB) of a winning combination and a stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a correspondence table between the abbreviation of the internal winning combination used in the control of the sub CPU and the abbreviation of the internal winning combination used in the control of the main CPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the race runner MAP lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race information MAP data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning target person lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race win rate MAP lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race win rate MAP data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race win rate MAP data table (percentage display) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race result lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race result lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race result lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (during AT, preparing for AT, during a race) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB precursor lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cycle shortening lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cycle shortening lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the direct addition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (when a kappa wins) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (when a kappa wins) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (when a kappa wins) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the Kappa Sushi MAP data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa game number acquisition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the Kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (first dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (second dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (third dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (fourth dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (fifth dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the processing example of the main control circuit of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the power-on processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of MAXBET input processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority pull-in control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus end check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the power-on processing performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lamp control task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sound control task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the mother task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the animation task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the command analysis processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving the initialization command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the race information lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general medium_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _ variable setting process in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT preparation _ variable setting processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general termination_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB end _ variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the race end_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ball ejection state update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the Bns state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB winning _Bns state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the | Bns state setting process between BB flags in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _Bns state setting process in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _Bns state setting process in JAC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _Bns state setting process in ChaBB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _Bns state setting process in ChaJAC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general middle _ game start processing (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general middle _ game start processing (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pseudo BB lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general middle BB_game start processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB rush determination process (at the time of starting a game) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BBJAC transition determination processing (at the time of starting a game) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB counter management processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a race_game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT preparation _ game start processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of AT_game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB_game start processing in AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general medium_game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general medium BB_gaming state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game state setting process during a race in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT preparation _ game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB_gaming state setting processing in AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a winning operation command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general middle BB_ prize-winning processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general small and medium-sized combination_ prize-winning processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a race | winning in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB_ prize-winning processing in AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of the race | loss in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the race | game start in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of the race | loss in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the MAXBET input process in the modification 6. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the number-designated input processing in the modification 6. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (general, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table in the modification 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (during AT, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table in the modification 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the cycle shortening lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected: the 1) in the modification 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the cycle shortening lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected: Part 2) in the modification 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) in the modification 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the direct addition lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) in the modification 7. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the start of the general middle_game in the modification 7. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the start of the general middle_game in the modification 7. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning rate UP function selection process in the modification 7. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery processing at the time of selection | winning rate UP function selection of the general | winning rate UP function in the modification 7. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of AT_game start in the modification 7. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery processing at the time of AT | winning rate UP function selection in modification 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the direct addition lottery table (the number of AT additions) in the modification 8. It is a figure which shows an example of the Kappa AT acquisition number lottery table in the modification 8. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the variable setting process in the modification 8. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT preparation _ variable setting processing in modification 8. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the race | game start in the modification 8. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start in the modification 8. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of AT_game start in the modification 8. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB_game start processing in AT in the modification 8. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process in the modification 9. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the input state command reception processing in the modification 9. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of AT_game start in the modification 9. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process of managing the number of AT end payouts in the modification 9. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process of managing the number of remaining AT games in the modification 9.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be taken as an example of a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine having an AT function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "losses". Such things are provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". In the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set. The number is set for one symbol.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. Further, the reel stop control means is, for example, 1 when the challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”) and the “MB” (middle bonus) that continuously operate the “CB”, which are the second type special accessories, are operated. For one or more reels, the rotation of the reels is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within the specified time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Further, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line. Let me.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of the displayed symbols is related to the winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, image display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is performed. Various productions are performed using it.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter, referred to as a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is a game. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet 2a. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that the carrier can handle when transporting the pachi-slot machine 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means) are provided side by side. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will also be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 20) patterns are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 (notifying means) are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 is provided in the upper end region of the front door 2b, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is arranged below the upper panel unit 10. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by the light emitted from the light source. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 executes an effect by displaying an image.

A pedestal portion 12 is provided at the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a frame member 13 and various devices to be operated by the player.

The frame member 13 has a symbol display area 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button mounting portion 15. As shown in FIG. 2, the symbol display area 4 and the information display window 14 are provided in the opening of the frame member 13, and the stop button mounting portion 15 is provided in the lower part of the opening of the frame member 13.

The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R arranged behind the display window (cabinet 2a side) can be seen through. Therefore, in the following, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. It is configured so that one symbol is displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is set in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (three in total). ) Is displayed. Then, in the present embodiment, in the frame of the reel display window 4, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is formed. It is defined as an effective line for judging whether or not a prize is won.

The information display window 14 is continuously provided at the lower part of the reel display window 4, and is arranged so that the surface direction of the information display surface faces upward. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16. The window cover 16 is arranged on the inner surface side of the frame member 13, and has a structure that cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b.

Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet mounting portion 17 facing the information display surface of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. Then, a seat member (information sheet) in which information about the game is described is arranged between the seat mounting portion 17 and the window cover 16. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with a window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps, and the window cover 16 serves as a mounting portion for the information sheet.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the window cover 16 is not removable from the front side of the front door 2b and has a smooth surface without unevenness or gaps. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that access the inside of the pachislot machine 1 via. The exchange of information sheets will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, as described above, an example in which the information display window 14 is continuously formed with the reel display window 4 at the opening of the frame member 13 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The information display window 14 may not be formed continuously with the reel display window 4. That is, the opening of the reel display window 4 and the opening of the information display window 14 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction.

The stop button mounting portion 15 is composed of a flat plate member having a substantially trapezoidal surface shape. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14 and is provided so that a substantially trapezoidal surface faces the front (player side). On the substantially trapezoidal surface of the stop button mounting portion 15, three through holes through which the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R each pass are provided side by side.

The three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are provided corresponding to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. These stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are one of various devices to be operated by the player. In the following, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are also referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

In addition to the stop button, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a medal insertion slot 20, a MAX bet button 21, a 1-bet button 22, and a start lever 23 as various devices to be operated by the player.

The medal slot 20 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 20 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be done. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a so-called credit function (game medium storage means).

The MAX bet button 21 and the 1-bet button 22 are provided to determine the number of medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to be used for one game. Further, the start lever 23 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

Further, when viewed from the front, a 7-segment display 24 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The 7-segment display 24 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of medals to be paid out), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Display digitally. Further, a selection button 25 (chance button) is provided on the right side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The selection button 25 is a button pressed by the player when a selection operation such as game playability is required. For example, in the AT start game number determination game when "Woman A" is won, which will be described later, this is pressed when the player selects one of the two types of AT start game number determination modes (modes). The selection button 25 is connected to the sub-control board 72 described later, and the sub-control board 72 detects the pressing of the selection button 25 and controls the selection operation based on the detection.

Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 12 of the front door 2b, respectively. Each side panel unit has a light source, and performs an effect by the light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the left side panel unit 26L. The checkout button 27 is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

A lumbar panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal portion 12 of the front door 2b. The lumbar panel unit 31 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

Below the lumbar panel unit 31, a medal payout outlet 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout outlet 32 guides the medal discharged by driving the hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray unit 34 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 32. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output sound effects and sounds such as music corresponding to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3 and 4 are views showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back surface side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. Further, FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.

The cabinet 2a is a box-shaped member, and has a top plate, a bottom plate, left and right side plates, and a back plate. On the upper side inside the cabinet 2a, for example, a cabinet-side speaker 42 for outputting a sound effect is provided.

A cabinet-side relay board 44 is arranged on one side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 (left side in FIGS. 3 and 4). The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 5 described later) attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (described later). This is a relay board for electrically connecting the medal payout count switch (not shown) and the medal payout count switch (not shown).

An amplifier board 45 that controls sound output by the cabinet-side speaker 42 is arranged in the central portion inside the cabinet 2a. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front (player side), the other side portion (right side in FIGS. 3 and 4) of the amplifier board 45 is the outside described later. A centralized terminal board 47 (see FIG. 5 described later) is arranged. The external centralized terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

A hopper device 51 (medal payout device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to a substantially central portion of the bottom plate of the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50, or when the settlement button 27 is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 32 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 5 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V into the power of the DC voltage required in each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 is arranged substantially in the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) is attached to the front door 2b so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 is attached with a main control board case 55 in which a main control board 71 (see FIG. 5 described later) is housed, and three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Has been done. Further, although not shown, a stepping motor (variation display means) is connected to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

In the present embodiment, when the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17 are exposed on the back surface of the front door 2b as shown in FIG. As described above, an information sheet on which information about the game is described is arranged between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet mounting portion 17. This information sheet is inserted into the gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened to expose the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17. The window. Further, when exchanging the information sheet, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56 (see FIG. 5 described later) described later. The setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 or confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. In the present embodiment, the main control board unit is composed of the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 6 described later) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and determining whether or not there is a prize. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

An auxiliary control board case 57 in which the auxiliary control board 72 (see FIG. 5 described later), which will be described later, is housed is arranged above the middle door 41 of the front door 2b. The sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57 has a sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 described later). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side, the sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later) described later is arranged on the right side of the sub-control board case 57. The sub-relay board 61 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, the sub-relay board 61 is a relay board that electrically connects the sub-control board 72 and the boards provided around the sub-control board 72. Examples of the substrate arranged around the sub-control substrate 72 include LED substrates 62A and 62B, which will be described later.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the LED substrates 62A and 62B are provided above the sub-control substrate case 57 when viewed from the back surface side of the front door 2b. The LED substrates 62A and 62B cause the LED (Light Emitting Diode) 85 (see FIG. 5 described later) to emit light according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 described later). Display the blinking pattern. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of LED substrates in addition to the LED substrates 62A and 62B.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 described later is arranged below the sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later). The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history information of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101) when the middle door 41 is opened.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged below the middle door 41. The lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged on the back surface of the front door 2b at positions facing the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

Further, above the lower speaker 65L of the front door 2b, a selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 described later (see FIG. 5 described later) are arranged. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of medals are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 20 to the hopper device 51. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is provided in a region below the reel display window 4 and in a region opened and closed by the middle door 41. The door relay terminal board 68 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the main control board 71 in the main control board case 55 and various buttons and switches, the sub control board 72, the selector 66, and the game operation display board 81. Yes (see FIG. 5 below). Examples of various buttons and switches include a MAX bet button 21, a 1-bet button 22, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, and a start switch 79.

<Control system of pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachislot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 56, a cabinet side relay board 44, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the configurations of the external centralized terminal plate 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52, and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b connected to the main control board 71 and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, and a BET switch 77 (bet detecting means) connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the door relay terminal plate 68. , Settlement switch 78, start switch 79, stop switch board 80, game operation display board 81, and sub-relay board 61. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The BET switch 77 detects that the MAX bet button 21 or the 1-bet button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the 7-segment display 24 and is inserted when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable, and when replaying the game. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals on the 7-segment display 24. Further, the game operation display board 81 is connected to the LED 82, and the LED 82 lights a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, or the like based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81, for example.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a sound I / O board 84, LED boards 62A and 62B, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. Since the LED substrates 62A and 62B and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The sound I / O board 84 outputs sound to a speaker group including lower speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown).

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 86 and a liquid crystal relay board 87 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing image (video), audio, light (LED group 85), and communication data for production. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 91 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 91 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 92 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit due to rotation of each reel. It is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

<Secondary control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 mounted on the sub-control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Contains various programs to execute. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light from a light source such as the LED group 85, and speakers 65L and 65R. It also includes various programs for executing voice control tasks and the like that control the output of sound by the LED.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speaker group such as the speakers 65L and 65R to output the sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Transition flow of RT game state>
Next, various RT gaming states controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and their transition flows will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, three types of RT game states, RT0 game state and RT2 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other are provided. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the replay is low, and the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the replay is high in both the RT1 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state. It is a game state.

The RT0 gaming state is an RT gaming state set in the initial state, and the number of medals to be hung for each unit game is one, two, or three. In the RT0 game state, information is notified to the effect that the player is instructed to multiply the number of medals by two (suggestion of two medals is made).

Then, in the RT0 gaming state, when the middle bonus (special internal winning combination) of the name "2MB" described later, which is internally won (established) only during the two-card game, is won, as shown in FIG. 8, the RT gaming state. Shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Further, in the RT0 game state, when the middle bonus of the name "3MB" described later, which is internally won (established) only when playing three cards, is won, as shown in FIG. 8, the RT game state is changed from the RT0 game state to RT2. It shifts to the game state.

In the RT1 game state, the number of medals to be hung for each unit game is 1, 2, or 3, but information is notified to the player to instruct the player to hang three medals. (Suggestion of three medals is made), so the game of three medals is mainly performed. In this case, the bonus of "2MB" won when the RT game state shifts to the RT1 game state is a bonus that is won only when the number of medals multiplied is 2, so in the RT1 game state, "2MB" The game is played with the bonus carried over. Therefore, in the following, the RT1 game state is also referred to as a "2MB flag state". In addition, in the game in the state between the 2MB flags, even if the "loss" is won internally, the "2MB" will not win. The main control circuit 91 controls the game operation in the state between the 2MB flags. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (inter-flag game control means) for controlling the game operation in the 2MB inter-flag state (inter-flag state).

However, in the RT1 game state, when a two-card game is played and a "2MB" bonus is won, the corresponding bonus game is activated. In the "2MB" bonus game, a two-card game is played, and when the number of medals paid out exceeds two, the "2MB" bonus game ends. Then, when the "2MB" bonus game is exhausted, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, as shown in FIG.

In the RT2 game state, the number of medals to be hung for each unit game is 1, 2, or 3, but since it is suggested to hang three medals, the game of three medals is mainly performed.

In the RT2 game state, when a three-card game is played and a "3MB" bonus is won, the corresponding bonus game is activated. In the "3MB" bonus game, a two-card game is played, and when the number of medals paid out exceeds 30, the "3MB" bonus game ends. Then, when the "3MB" bonus game is exhausted, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, in the RT2 gaming state, it is possible to play the game in a state in which the bonus of "3MB" won when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state is carried over. The RT2 game state is also referred to as a "3MB flag state".

In the present embodiment, the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is 3 (predetermined) in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) or the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state). If it is less than the maximum number of medals, even if the player presses the MAX bet button 21, the medal betting operation (insertion operation) cannot be performed. That is, in the state between 2MB flags or the state between 3MB flags, when the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is 2 or less, the player presses the MAX bet button 21. Even if it is pressed, the operation is treated as invalid.

If the total number of medals credited and inserted is two in the state between the 2MB flags, and the player's MAX bet operation is enabled, a two-card game is played and the medals are being carried over. There is a possibility that "2MB" will win a prize. In this case, since the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. However, as in the present embodiment, when the total number of medals credited and inserted is 2 or less in the state between the 2MB flags, the player's MAX betting operation is invalidated, so that the player's MAX betting operation is disabled. It is possible to prevent the gaming state from shifting to a disadvantageous gaming state unintentionally.

In the present embodiment, when the total number of medals credited and inserted is less than 3 not only in the 2MB flag state and the 3MB flag state but also in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). , The player's MAX betting operation may be disabled.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 23.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 9). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and defines the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, in the order of proceeding in the reel rotation direction (direction from the symbol position "19" in FIG. 9 toward the symbol position "0") with the symbol position "0" as a reference, " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the value of the symbol counter ("0" to "19") and the symbol arrangement table, the reels are displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of symbol. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "7", the symbol position "8" is set in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of the left reel 3L in the frame of the left display window 4L, respectively. The symbol "yellow BAR", the symbol "watermelon 1" at the symbol position "7", and the symbol "orange" at the symbol position "6" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (Nos. 1 to 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols (combination and combination name) predetermined according to the type of privilege (bonus, small combination, replay), and the contents (storage area, data) and payout of the corresponding display combination code. Define the correspondence with the number of sheets.

In the present embodiment, a prize is won when the combination of symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus. If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the symbol combinations specified in the symbol combination table, a so-called "loss" occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination of "loss" is specified by not specifying the symbol combination corresponding to "loss" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "missing" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify the "missing" symbol combination.

The various data described in the display combination code column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination code column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique combination of symbols (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination code column is data for designating the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30 described later) in which the data of the corresponding symbol combination is stored. In this embodiment, 15 symbol code storage areas are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to the difference in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the symbol combination in which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out. For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination related to the combination name "CT bell" is determined for the number of inserted three medals (the symbol combination related to "CT bell" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In the case of), 10 medals will be paid out.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name "CT lip" is determined (when the symbol combination related to "CT lip" is stopped and displayed on the effective line), the replay is activated. To do. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name "3MB" or "2MB" (when the symbol combination related to "3MB" or "2MB" is stopped and displayed on the valid line) is determined. , MB (middle bonus) works.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the present embodiment, "0" is specified in the "three-sheet hanging" column of "3MB", but a number is not specified in the "two-sheet hanging" column. .. Further, although "0" is specified in the "2 sheets" column of "2MB", a number is not specified in the "3 sheets" column. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination (display combination) of "3MB" is valid (winning) only when three cards are hung, and invalid (missing) when two cards are hung. In addition, the symbol combination (display combination) of "2MB" is valid (winning) only when two cards are hung, and invalid (missing) when three cards are hung.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 20. In the present embodiment, an internal lottery table is provided separately for each of the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the RT1 gaming state (2MB flag-to-2MB flag state), the RT2 gaming state (3MB-flag-to-flag state), and the MB gaming state. Further, in each of the RT0 game state (general game state), the RT1 game state (2MB flag state), and the RT2 game state (3MB flag state), an internal lottery table is provided for each number of medals multiplied. As shown in the payout number column in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 10 to 12, in the present embodiment, all the numbers are not specified in the "single sheet" column. That is, in the one-card game, all the symbol combinations (display combinations) described in the symbol combination tables of FIGS. 10 to 12 are invalid (missing). Therefore, the description of the internal lottery table for the game at the time of "single piece hanging" is omitted here.

Each internal lottery table has a winning number (internal winning combination), a lottery value (winning probability) when each winning number is determined, and a data pointer (small winning combination / small winning combination) acquired when each winning number is determined. The correspondence between the replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer) is specified. For convenience of explanation, the abbreviation of the internal winning combination is also described in the internal lottery table referred to when the number of medals multiplied is three, which is shown in FIGS. 13 to 15. Further, in the internal lottery table referred to when the number of medals multiplied is two and the internal lottery table referred to during the MB game state shown in FIGS. 16 to 20, in order to simplify the explanation, the internal winning combination is used. The description of the name and data pointer is omitted.

In addition, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a preset bonus or small winning combination. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value (external random number value) extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) is set as a lottery value defined corresponding to each winning number. Subtract sequentially with. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur) at the predetermined winning number, it means that the winning number (internal winning combination) has been won.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the higher the winning number defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data pointer will be determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

(1) General (RT0) Internal lottery table for game status (3 sheets)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (three-sheet hanging) for a general (RT0) gaming state. This internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (three-card hanging) is referred to when the number of medals hung for the unit game is three in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). The general (RT0) game state internal lottery table (3 sheets) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "58" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability) and data pointer. To do.

For example, in the general game state (RT0 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the general (RT0) game state is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is the winning. The probability of doing so is "0". On the other hand, in the general game state (RT0 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the general (RT0) game state is referred to, the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") is the winning. The probability of doing so is "17200/65536 (1 / 3.8)". Then, in this case, "0" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "2" is acquired as the bonus data pointer. That is, in the present embodiment, when a three-card game is played in the general game state (RT0 game state), only "3 MB" is won as a bonus.

Further, for example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the general (RT0) gaming state is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination "normal lip 1") is referred to. The probability of winning the prize is "374/65536 (1 / 175.2)". Then, in this case, "1" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

(2) Between 2MB flags (RT1) Internal lottery table for game status (3 sheets)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (for 3 sheets) for a game state between 2MB flags (RT1). The internal lottery table for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state (3 cards) is referred to when the number of medals for the unit game is 3 in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state). The relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "58" (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery value (winning probability), and the data pointer in the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state. To specify.

For example, when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state is referred to in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state), the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is referred to. ) Or the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") has a winning probability of "0". That is, in the present embodiment, when the game of three cards is played in the state between the 2MB flags (RT1 game state), both the bonuses of "2MB" and "3MB" are not won.

Further, for example, when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state is referred to in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state), the winning number "4" (internal winning combination "" The probability of winning the normal lip 1 ") is" 2048/65536 (1/32) ". Then, in this case, "1" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the winning numbers "4" to "16" of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 sheets) shown in FIG. 13 and the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state internal shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those of the lottery table (three-card hanging), the winning probability of the replay combination in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) is higher than that in the general game state (RT0 game state).

(3) Between 3MB flags (RT2) Internal lottery table for game status (3 sheets)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (for 3 sheets) for a game state between 3MB flags (RT2). This internal lottery table for 3MB flag-to-game state (RT2 game state) is referred to when the number of medals to be hung for a unit game is 3 in the 3MB flag-to-game state (RT2 game state). The relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "58" (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery value (winning probability), and the data pointer in the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state. To specify.

For example, in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is referred to. ) Or the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") has a winning probability of "0". That is, in the present embodiment, when a three-card game is played in a state between 3MB flags (RT2 game state), neither the bonus of "2MB" nor the bonus of "3MB" is won.

Further, for example, when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state is referred to in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state), the winning number "4" (internal winning combination " The probability of winning the normal lip 1 ") is" 500/65536 (1/131) ". Then, in this case, "1" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the winning numbers "4" to "16" of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 sheets) shown in FIG. 13 and the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state internal shown in FIG. As is clear from a comparison with those of the lottery table (three-card hanging), the winning probability of the replay combination in the 3MB flag state (RT2 gaming state) is higher than that in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). Further, the winning probabilities of the winning numbers "4" to "16" of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state shown in FIG. 14 and the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those of the internal lottery table (3 sheets), the winning probability of the replay role in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state) is lower than that in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state). Become.

(4) General (RT0) Internal lottery table for game status (2 sheets)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (for two sheets) for a general (RT0) gaming state. This internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (two-card hanging) is referred to when the number of medals hung for the unit game is two in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). The general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two-ply) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "5" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). The internal winning combination of the name "two bells" in FIG. 16 corresponds to all small combinations.

For example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (hanging two sheets) is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is the winning. The probability of doing so is "26000/65536 (1 / 2.52)". On the other hand, in the general game state (RT0 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) game state (two pieces) is referred to, the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") is the winning. The probability of doing so is "0". That is, in the present embodiment, when a two-card game is played in the general game state (RT0 game state), only "2 MB" is won as a bonus.

Further, for example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (hanging two sheets) is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination "normal lip 1") is referred to. The probability of winning ") is" 8978/65536 (1 / 7.3) ".

(5) Between 2MB flags (RT1) Internal lottery table for game status (2 sheets)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (for two sheets) for a game state between 2MB flags (RT1). The internal lottery table for the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state (two-card hanging) is referred to when the number of medals hung for the unit game is two in the twoMB flag-to-game state (RT1 gaming state). The 2MB flag-to-game state internal lottery table (two-ply) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "5" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). .. In addition, for example, the name "2MB + 2 bells" in FIG. 17 corresponds to the case where the internal winning combination of the name "2 bells" (all small roles) wins while carrying over "2MB".

For example, in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (2 sheets) for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is referred to. ) Or the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") has a winning probability of "0". That is, in the present embodiment, when a two-card game is played in a state between 2MB flags (RT1 game state), neither the bonus of "2MB" nor the bonus of "3MB" is won.

Further, for example, when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the game state (RT1) between the 2MB flags (RT1 game state) is referred to in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state), the winning number "4" (internal winning combination " The probability of winning 2MB + normal lip 1 ”) is“ 32978/65536 (1 / 1.99) ”.

It should be noted that the winning probability of the winning number "4" of the general (RT0) game state internal lottery table (2 sheets) shown in FIG. 16 and the 2MB flag (RT1) game state internal lottery table (2) shown in FIG. As is clear from a comparison with that of the two-card game, the winning probability of the replay role in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) is higher than that of the general game state (RT0 game state). Become.

(6) Between 3MB flags (RT2) Internal lottery table for game status (2 sheets)
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (for two sheets) for a game state between 3MB flags (RT2). The internal lottery table for the 3MB flag-to-game state (RT2 game state) is referred to when the number of medals to be hung for the unit game is two in the 3MB flag-to-game state (RT2 game state). The internal lottery table for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state (two pieces) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "5" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). .. In addition, for example, the name "3MB + 2 bells" in FIG. 18 corresponds to the case where the internal winning combination of the name "2 bells" (all small roles) wins while carrying over "3MB".

For example, in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (2 sheets) for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is referred to. ) Or the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") has a winning probability of "0". That is, in the present embodiment, when a two-card game is played in a state between 3MB flags (RT2 game state), neither the bonus of "2MB" nor the bonus of "3MB" is won.

Further, for example, in the state between 3MB flags (RT2 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (hanging 2 sheets) for the game state between 3MB flags (RT2) is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination " The probability of winning 3MB + normal lip 1 ”) is“ 8980/65536 (1 / 7.3) ”.

It should be noted that the winning probability of the winning number "4" of the general (RT0) game state internal lottery table (2 sheets) shown in FIG. 16 and the 3MB flag (RT2) game state internal lottery table (2) shown in FIG. As is clear from a comparison with that of the two-card game, the winning probability of the replay role in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state) is higher than that of the general game state (RT0 game state). Become. Further, the winning probability of the winning number "4" of the internal lottery table for the game state (RT1) between the 2MB flags shown in FIG. 17 and the internal lottery table for the game state between the 3MB flags (RT2) shown in FIG. As is clear from the comparison with that of (2 cards), the winning probability of the replay role in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state) is the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) even in the 2-card game. It will be lower than that.

(7) Internal lottery table for 2MB gaming state FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for 2MB gaming state. This 2MB game state internal lottery table is referred to when the middle bonus "2MB" is activated (when the game state is the 2MB game state). The 2MB game state internal lottery table defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" and "2" and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, when the gaming state is the 2MB gaming state, the internal winning combination of the name "CB combination" is always won. The internal winning combination of the name "CB role" corresponds to all small roles.

(8) Internal lottery table for 3MB gaming state FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of an internal lottery table for 3MB gaming state. This 3MB game state internal lottery table is referred to when the middle bonus "3MB" is activated (when the game state is the 3MB game state). The 3MB game state internal lottery table defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" and "2" and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the 3MB gaming state, the internal winning combination of the name “CB combination” is always won.

[Design combination determination table]
Next, the symbol combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23. The symbol combination determination table defines the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on the effective line (center line). That is, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be displayed on the valid line, that is, the type of display combination that can be won is uniquely determined. The black circles in each symbol combination determination table indicate the symbol combinations (combinations) that can be displayed on the effective line (center line) in the winning internal winning combination.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "normal lip 1", the names "CT lip", "CU lip", "bell lip 1" to "bell lip 8", "BTBAR1" to "BTBAR6", "CTSVN1", The symbol combination of "CTSVN2", "CDSVN2" and "CDSVN3" can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "213 bell 1", the symbol combination of the names "CT bell" and "control combination 1" to "control combination 10" can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is the combination of the name "CB combination", the symbol combinations of all the small combinations can be stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the symbol combination determination table does not specify the case where the "internal winning combination" is "lost", but this is all the symbols defined by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 10 to 12. Indicates that the display of combinations is not allowed.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. Although description is omitted here, storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used in various reel effects (various game locks) are also provided in the main RAM 95.

[Internal winning combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the internal winning combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 24. In the present embodiment, the internal winning combination storage area is composed of the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 7 represented by 1 byte of data, respectively.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 7, it indicates that the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit has won the internal winning combination. The internal winning combination storage area shown in FIG. 24 does not specify a storage area corresponding to the internal winning combination of the names "two bells" and "CB combination", but when these internal winning combinations are won. In, "1" is stored in the storage area (bit) of all the internal winning combinations related to the small winning combination.

[Display combination storage area]
Next, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, each display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 0 to 7 represented by 1 byte of data.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the display combination storage areas 0 to 7, it indicates that various symbol combinations of the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit are displayed on the valid line. ..

[Carryover storage area]
Next, the configuration of the carry-over combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the carry-over combination storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area.

As a result of the internal lottery, when either "2MB" or "3MB" is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. Further, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 27. The game state flag storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit in the game state flag storage area.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area, the middle bonus "2MB" is being operated, indicating that the game state is the 2MB game state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 28. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 19L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 19L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 93 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The press order storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores a 1-byte press order flag.

In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left, middle, right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, each of the symbol code storage areas is composed of symbol code storage areas 0 to 14 represented by 1 byte of data.

In the symbol code storage area, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the display combination (symbol combination) that can be stopped on the effective line. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 0 to 14.

<Correspondence table between internal winning combination and stop order>
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the reel stop order will be described.

FIG. 31 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order during non-bonus (non-MB), and shows the types of display combinations corresponding to the combination of the internal winning combination and the reel stop order. In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, FIG. 31 shows only the internal winning combination in which the role of the internal winning combination in the game is different depending on the pushing order.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "213 bell 1", the symbol combination of the name (combination name) "CT bell" and "control combination 1" to "control combination 10" can be stopped and displayed. In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 31), the symbol combination related to the combination name "CT bell" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, the reels are "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 31), "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 31), "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 31). ”),“ Right / left middle ”(stop order“ 312 ”in FIG. 31) or“ right middle left ”(stop order“ 321 ”in FIG. 31), the combination names“ control combination 1 ”to“ Any symbol combination of "control combination 10" is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "231 bell 5", the combination names "CT bell", "control combination 1" to "control combination 8", "control combination 17", and "control combination 19" are combined. Can be stopped and displayed. In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 31), the symbol combination related to the combination name "CT bell" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, the reels are "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 31), "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 31), "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 31). ”),“ Right / left middle ”(stop order“ 312 ”in FIG. 31) or“ right middle left ”(stop order“ 321 ”in FIG. 31), the combination names“ control combination 1 ”to“ Any one of the symbol combinations of "control combination 8", "control combination 17", and "control combination 19" is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "3xx3 bells", the combination names "CD bell", "control combination 1" to "control combination 4", and "control combination 9" to "control combination 24" are combined. Can be stopped and displayed. In this case, if the reels are stopped in the order of "right, left, middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. 31) or "right, middle, left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 31), the combination name is changed to "CD bell". The symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, the reels are "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 31), "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 31), "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 31). ”) Or“ Middle right / left ”(stop order“ 231 ”in FIG. 31), the combination names“ control combination 1 ”to“ control combination 4 ”and“ control combination 9 ”to“ control combination 24 ” One of the symbol combinations is stopped and displayed on the valid line.

<Various sub-game states>
Next, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various sub-gaming states related to the effect controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 (sub-CPU 102) in the 2MB flag-to-2MB flag state (RT1 gaming state) will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the sub-game state during the 2MB flag state, mainly states called "non-AT state", "AT preparation state", "AT state" and "pseudo BB (big bonus) state" are provided. Be done. The game in the "pseudo BB state" is performed as an interrupt process when the pseudo BB lottery performed in the "non-AT state", "AT preparation state", and "AT state" is won.

Further, in the present embodiment, although detailed description is omitted, as a sub-game state during the 2MB flag state, a state called "W chance state" that can be shifted from "AT state", "AT state" or "AT state" or ". A state called "additional challenge state" that can be transferred from "pseudo BB state" is also provided. Hereinafter, the contents of each sub-game state will be specifically described.

As described below, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a predetermined privilege (shortening the cycle of the non-AT state or adding the number of AT games) at the time of winning the "loss" in various sub-game states during the 2MB flag state. ) Is provided. Then, this privilege giving function is controlled by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining whether or not to grant a predetermined privilege at the time of winning the "loss" (privilege grant determination means).

[Non-AT state]
The non-AT state is composed of a "normal state" and a "transition effect state" to the AT state. Then, in the non-AT state, basically, the games in the normal state and the transition effect state are periodically repeated with a predetermined unit number of games (190 games in the present embodiment).

Specifically, in a non-AT one-cycle game, first, a game in a normal state (hereinafter referred to as a "normal game") in which the number of games in one set is 180 games (the number of first unit games) is performed. It is said. Next, after the normal game is digested, a game in a transition effect state (hereinafter, referred to as a transition effect game) is performed for a period of 10 games.

Then, at the start of the transition effect game, an AT lottery is performed, and if the lottery result is an AT win, an effect corresponding to the AT win is performed during the transition effect game period, and then the sub game state is the AT preparation state. Move to. On the other hand, if the result of the AT lottery is AT non-winning, the production corresponding to AT non-winning is performed during the transition effect game, and then the next set of normal games (games in the non-AT state of the next cycle) are performed. To be started.

As described above, when the result of the AT lottery in the transition effect game is non-winning, the normal game and the transition effect game are periodically repeated in a predetermined number of games (190 games). Then, in this periodic game digestion process, basically, after the normal game is digested (after 180 games are digested), a chance to shift to the AT state is always given. That is, in the non-AT state, a chance to shift to the AT state is given periodically. Hereinafter, the contents of the normal game and the transition production game will be described in more detail.

(1) Normal game In a normal game, a winning / non-winning lottery of a game in a pseudo BB state (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo BB game") based on an internal winning combination (hereinafter, "pseudo BB game") is drawn for each game (for each unit game). "Pseudo BB lottery") is performed.

Then, in the normal game, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process. During the period of the pseudo BB game, the number of games of the normal game is not counted (subtracted). Then, when the pseudo BB game is digested, the sub-game state returns to the normal state. At this time, the normal game is restarted from the state before the start of the pseudo BB game.

In addition, in a normal game, a "loss" or a specific internal winning combination (in this embodiment, any one of "normal lip", "weak che", "strong che", and "rare role") is internally won. In this case or in the case of continuous winning, a subtraction lottery for the number of remaining games in the normal game of the current set, that is, a lottery for shortening the game period in the non-AT state of the current cycle (hereinafter referred to as "cycle shortening lottery") is performed. Therefore, if the cycle shortening lottery is won in the normal game, the period until the transition effect game is started in the non-AT state game period of the current cycle is shortened. That is, there is a possibility that the period until the start of the game in the AT state will be shorter.

In the present embodiment, when the cycle shortening lottery is won in the normal game during the period in which the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set is a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of unit games: 10 games in the present embodiment). Is the number of winning shortened games subtracted from the number of remaining games in the normal game of the current set. At this time, if the subtraction result is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games) (the subtraction result may be a negative value), the absolute value of the number of games of the subtraction result is a shortened game of the surplus in the current set. It is stocked as a number (surplus unit number of games). On the other hand, if the cycle shortening lottery is won in the normal game during the period when the remaining number of normal games in the current set is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games), the number of shortened games won is the number of surplus shortened games. Stocked as.

For example, if the predetermined number of games is 10 games, the remaining number of normal games in the current set is 30 games, and the number of winning shortened games is 50 games, the subtraction result is -20 games. Therefore, the number of games stocked as the number of shortened games for the surplus is 20 games. At this time, the standard of the number of shortened games stocked as the surplus is set to the predetermined number of games (10 games), and the difference between the value of the predetermined number of games (10) and the value of the subtraction result (-20) is supported. The number of games to be played (30 games) may be the number of shortened games for the surplus. Further, for example, when the predetermined number of games is 10 games, the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set is 5 games, and the number of winning shortened games is 50 games, the number of shortened games for the surplus is used. The number of games stocked will be 50 games.

Then, the number of shortened games of the stocked surplus is applied at the start of the non-AT state game of the next cycle, that is, at the start of the normal game of the next set, and at that time, the game period of the normal state (non-AT state). Is shortened. In this case, in the non-AT state game period of the next cycle, the period until the transition effect game is started is shortened. That is, when a surplus number of shortened games is generated as a result of the cycle shortening lottery, the period until the start of the game in the AT state may be shorter even in the next cycle. Further, for example, depending on the number of shortened games (the number of stocked shortened games) obtained by the cycle shortening lottery, there is a possibility that the transition effect game is started from the beginning in the non-AT state game period of the next cycle.

(2) Transition effect state In the transition effect game, the effect (notification) game indicating the result (win / non-win) of the AT lottery performed at the start of the game period is a specific number of games (third unit number of games: book). In the embodiment, 10 games) are played. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transition effect game, an effect (race effect) in which a plurality of ally characters and an enemy character race is performed as an effect indicating the result of the AT lottery. The race effect is mainly performed by displaying the race image on the liquid crystal display device 11. Here, the content of the race effect (transition effect to the AT state) performed in the transition effect game will be described more specifically.

Specifically, first, at the start of the race production (transition production game), a lottery (race result lottery) is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined ally character set in advance as a race victory target (candidate) wins the race. Do. Then, in this race result lottery, if the race victory of the predetermined ally character is won, the AT is won, and if the race victory of the predetermined ally character is non-winning, the AT is not won.

In addition, at the start of the race production (transition production game), a plurality of ally characters including a predetermined ally character set as a race victory target (candidate) and an enemy character are displayed on the liquid crystal display as race participants. It is displayed in 11. Then, during the subsequent game period of the race effect, the liquid crystal display device 11 performs an image effect in which the predetermined ally character wins the race at the time of AT winning, and an image effect in which the enemy character wins the race at the time of AT non-winning. This is done by the liquid crystal display device 11.

Therefore, as a result of the race production performed in the transition production game, if a predetermined ally character wins, the sub-game state shifts from the transition production state to the AT preparation state, and if the enemy character wins, the next set ( The normal game (game in the non-AT state) of the next cycle) is started. In this embodiment, the number of basic stay games in the AT state to be played after that changes depending on the type of ally character who won the race, and this point will be described in detail later.

Further, in the present embodiment, six types of ally characters are provided: "male A", "male B", "female A", "kappa", "tengu", and "male A / male B". Information on the types of ally characters who are the target (candidates) for winning the race in the race production of the transition production game and the content of the race production regarding the race win rate of the ally character can be found in the non-AT state game of the current cycle. If the information regarding the content of the race effect is not set (when the race runner MAP described later is not set (initial state) or the race information MAP data described later is "0"), the current cycle is not set. It is determined by lottery at the start of the game in the AT state (at the start of the game period of the normal game). Further, at this time, in the present embodiment, not only the information on the content of the race effect of the current set (first race) but also the information on the content of the race effect up to the fourth set ahead (fifth game) is determined.

Further, in the transition effect game, a pseudo BB lottery is performed every game based on the internal winning combination. Then, in the transition effect game, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process, and when the pseudo BB game is digested, the sub game state shifts to the AT preparation state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied during the game period (during the race effect period) in the transition effect state (when the pseudo BB state becomes "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation": described later. (See FIG. 111 in FIG. 111), an additional lottery for the number of AT games is performed, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined number of additional AT games is obtained.

The operation control of the above-mentioned normal game and transition effect game is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for controlling the operation of the normal game and the transition effect game (normal game control means and transition effect game control means).

[AT ready state]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub-game state shifts from the transition effect state to the AT state, the sub-game state shifts to the AT state via the AT preparation state. In the AT preparation state, a game (hereinafter, referred to as “AT start game number determination game”) for determining the number of basic stay games in the AT state (hereinafter, referred to as “AT start game number”) is performed. In the AT start game number determination game (notified game number determination game), a pseudo BB lottery is also performed for each game based on the internal winning combination.

In the present embodiment, the number of AT start games (the number of basic unit games) is the type of ally character (“male A”, “male B”, “female A”, “kappa”, etc. It changes according to "tengu" or "male A / male B"). Specifically, it is as follows.

(1) When "Man A" wins
When "Man A" wins the race production, the number of AT start games is determined. The number of AT start games is drawn based on the internal winning combination, triggered by the lever operation performed in the start game of the game. The number of AT start games (50 to 300 games) is determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of AT start games may not be determined in the start game of the AT start game number determination game when "Man A" wins. In this case, the AT start game number determination game is continued. When the lever is operated in the next game, the number of AT start games is drawn again. At this time, the number of times the AT start game number determination game is continued (once or twice in this embodiment) changes according to the internal winning combination determined in the AT start game number determination game start game. Then, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Man A" wins, a lottery table (not shown) for the number of AT start games is appropriately set so that the number of AT start games acquired increases as the number of continuations increases. ing.

(2) When "Man B" wins If "Man B" wins in the race production, the number of AT start games will be drawn by the lever operation performed in the game start game. We, the predetermined number of AT start games (50 to 300 games) is determined. In the game of determining the number of AT start games when "Man B" wins, the number of AT start games is determined in one game. The lottery value of the number of AT start games used in the lottery for determining the number of AT start games when "Man B" wins is the same regardless of the internal winning combination.

(3) When "Woman A" wins When "Woman A" wins in the race production, the number of AT start games is determined by the continuous hitting operation of the MAX bet button 21. In the AT start game number determination game when "Woman A" wins in the present embodiment, two types of AT start game number determination modes (determination modes) are prepared.

Specifically, a first mode in which 50 AT start games are added by one MAX bet operation, and a second mode in which 5 AT start games are added by one MAX bet operation. Is prepared. In both modes, a continuous lottery is performed for the addition process of the number of AT start games for each MAX bet operation. In the first mode, the continuation probability is 50%, and in the second mode, the continuation probability is 95%. Become. The determination form (determination mode) of the number of AT start games is selected by the player at the start of the AT start game number determination game (game in the AT ready state).

In the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins, first, at the end of the next game (after all reels are stopped) after the liquid crystal display device 11 notifies the victory of "Woman A", the AT start game Information indicating that the number determination mode (determination mode) is to be selected is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Next, by operating the player's selection button 25, one of the first mode and the second mode is selected as the AT start game number determination mode. Next, when the lever operation of the next game of the game in which the selection operation of the AT start game number determination mode is performed is performed, the AT start game number determination mode (first mode or second mode) selected by the player is performed. Mode) is confirmed (determined). Then, in the game in which the determination operation of the determination mode of the number of AT start games is performed, after the reels are completely stopped, the number of AT start games is added by the continuous operation of the MAX bet button 21. That is, the AT start game number determination game at the time of "Woman A" victory is performed over two games after the liquid crystal display device 11 notifies the victory of "Woman A".

Then, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins, a predetermined number is determined for each MAX bet operation until the result of the continuous lottery of the addition process of the number of AT start games performed for each MAX bet operation becomes non-winning. The number of AT games (50 games or 5 games) is added to the number of AT start games. It should be noted that the number of AT start games is added only at the time of the MAX bet operation when the continuous lottery of the process of adding the number of AT start games is won. Therefore, for example, in the AT start game number determination game when "Woman A" wins, the first mode is selected, and the result of the continuous lottery of the AT start game number addition process in the sixth MAX bet operation. If is not won, the number of AT start games will be 250 games.

In addition, when the first mode is selected, if the result of the continuous lottery of the addition processing of the number of AT start games is unwinned in the first MAX bet operation, the number of AT start games is reduced to 50 games. Set. That is, when the first mode is selected, the number of AT start games of 50 games is guaranteed. Further, when the second mode is selected, the number of additional games for each MAX bet operation is small, so that the MAX bet operation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 games) is guaranteed.

(4) When "Tengu" wins When "Tengu" wins in the race production, the lever operation performed in the start game of the AT start game number determination game is used as an opportunity, as in the case of "Man B" victory. The number of AT start games is drawn, and a predetermined number of AT start games is determined. Also in this case, the number of AT start games is determined in one game as well.

However, in the AT start game number determination game when the "tengu" wins, the number of AT start games of 100 games or more is determined, unlike when the "man B" wins (the number of AT start games of 50 or more games is determined).

(5) When "Kappa" wins If "Kappa" wins in the race production, the video production of "Kappa" eating sushi (hereinafter referred to as "Kappa sushi production") will be performed in the AT start game number determination game. It is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11 over a plurality of games. In this Kappa sushi production, the number of AT start games is added each time "Kappa" eats sushi, and the number of added games (addition unit number of games) is the sushi material (game information) eaten by "Kappa". It changes accordingly.

The types of sushi that "Kappa" eats in this embodiment are "squid", "egg", "kappa roll", "salmon", "squid", "tuna", "sea urchin" and "spiny lobster". Eight types are available. The higher the quality of the sushi material, the greater the number of additional games.

Here, the content of the AT start game number determination game (directed by Kappa Sushi) at the time of winning "Kappa" will be described more specifically. First, when the AT start game number determination game is started, the appearance pattern of the sushi material from the first game to the tenth game (1st to 10th dishes) is determined by lottery, and the determined 1st dish is determined. The sushi ingredients up to the 10th dish are sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

After that, the effect of eating sushi or not eating the sushi material in which "Kappa" is sequentially produced is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 for each game, and when the effect of "Kappa" eating the sushi material is executed, The number of additional games is acquired. For example, as shown in the Kappa game number acquisition lottery table of FIG. 55 described later, when "Kappa" eats the sushi material "Squid", 10 or 300 games are added to the number of AT start games depending on the lottery result. Is obtained as. Further, for example, when "Kappa" eats the sushi material "Ise lobster", 100, 150, 200 or 300 games are acquired as the number of additional games depending on the lottery result. Then, the total number of additional games corresponding to all the sushi ingredients eaten by "Kappa" by the end of the AT start game number determination game is set as the AT start game number.

In the above-mentioned Kappa Sushi production, whether or not to eat the sushi material with "Kappa" is determined based on the type of internal winning role. Specifically, when the internal winning role is the "group 1 role" (for example, "213 bell 1" to "213 bell 8", etc.) described later, the "kappa" eats sushi material, and other than this. In the case of an internal winning role, "Kappa" does not eat sushi. That is, during the period of the game for determining the number of AT start games when the "Kappa" wins, the number of AT start games is added for each game in which the internal winning combination becomes the "group 1 combination" described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, every time "Kappa" eats sushi material in the Kappa sushi production, the sushi material displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is reduced. However, when the sushi material to be served at the 5th game destination (6th plate) is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, that is, when the sushi material after the 6th game (6th plate) is not determined, At this point, the sushi ingredients for the sixth game (sixth dish) and thereafter are determined by lottery.

In addition, the end trigger of the AT start game number determination game when the "Kappa" wins is managed by the "Kappa end counter", and the value (end parameter) of the Kappa end counter becomes less than "0" (predetermined condition). In that case, the AT start game number determination game at the time of "Kappa" victory ends. In this embodiment, the initial value of the kappa end counter is set to "5".

The value of the kappa end counter is subtracted by "1" when "kappa" eats a specific sushi material (sushi material with wasabi), specifically "squid", "salmon" or "tuna". Will be done. That is, in the current game, the data of any sushi material of "squid", "salmon" and "tuna" is set as the sushi material to be eaten by "kappa", and the internal winning role is the "group" described later. In the case of "1 role", the number of additional games corresponding to the sushi material is acquired, but the value of the kappa end counter is subtracted by "1".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "kappa" eats a predetermined sushi material, specifically, the "kappa roll", the value of the kappa end counter is added by "1". However, in this case, the number of additional games is not acquired. That is, in the current game, if the data of the sushi material of "Kappa roll" is set as the sushi material to be eaten by "Kappa" and the internal winning role is "Group 1 role" described later, it is added. Although the number of games cannot be obtained, the value of the kappa end counter is added by "1", and the period of the AT start game number determination game is extended.

In the present embodiment, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when the "Kappa" wins, the internal winning role is a specific role other than the "Group 1 role" described later ("Loss", "Reach eye lip", "Weak". If it is one of "Che", "Strong Che", "Watermelon", "Chance A", "Chance B" and "Definite role"), 5 games (2nd to 6th dishes) from the next game A lottery (data conversion generation lottery) is performed as to whether or not to perform data conversion of the sushi material (see FIG. 56 described later). Then, when the lottery for generating data conversion of the sushi material is won, in the present embodiment, the number of additional games associated with the converted sushi material is equal to or greater than the number of additional games associated with the sushi material before conversion. The sushi material data is converted so as to be a value (see FIGS. 57 to 61 described later).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the value of the Kappa end counter becomes less than "0" in the AT start game number determination game at the time of "Kappa" victory, the player repeatedly hits the MAX bet button 21 to " A lottery will be held to revive the game that determines the number of AT start games when "Kappa" wins. Specifically, a revival lottery is performed by continuously pressing the MAX bet button 21 20 times. At this time, since the revival lottery is performed every time the MAX bet button 21 is pressed, the revival lottery is performed 20 times. Then, when the revival lottery by continuously pressing the MAX bet button 21 is won, the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "Kappa" is started again, and the number of AT start games can be further increased.

(6) When "Man A / Man B" wins In the game of determining the number of AT start games when "Man A / Man B" wins in the race production, first, in the first game, the number of AT start games is added. 10 games will be won. After that, until the 10th game, the number of additional games that can be acquired for each game (every continuation) increases by "10". That is, in the first game, the second game, the third game, ..., the ninth game, and the tenth game, the number of additional games that can be acquired is 10, 20, 30, ..., 90, 100 games, respectively. Further, the number of additional games that can be acquired after the 11th game is 100 games for each game.

Therefore, for example, in the AT start game number determination game at the time of "male A / male B" victory, if the game is continued until the tenth game, 550 games are acquired as the number of AT start games. Further, if the game is continued after the 11th game, the number of AT start games is increased by 100 games for each game (the number of AT start games is 650 games, 750 games, ...).

In addition, the continuation probability of each game of the AT start game number determination game at the time of "male A / male B" victory is 80%, and when this continuous lottery is not won, "male A / male B" wins. The AT start game number determination game at the time ends.

Further, in the AT start game number determination game when the "male A / male B" of the present embodiment is won, the continuation confirmation until the second game is guaranteed. However, if the continuous lottery is not won in the second game, the number of AT start games is 30 games. In this case, the number of AT start games is set to 50 games. That is, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when "male A / male B" wins, the acquisition of the number of AT start games of 50 games is guaranteed at a minimum.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of AT start games that can be obtained when "Tengu", "Kappa" or "Man A / Man B" wins in the race production of the transition production game is "Man A". , "Man B" or "Woman A" is set to be more than that when winning. Therefore, if the runners displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 at the start of the race production of the transition production game include "tengu", "kappa", or "male A / male B", more ATs will start. It is possible to expect the player to acquire the number of games.

The operation control of the various AT start game number determination games described above is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for controlling the operation of the AT start game number determination game (notification number determination game control means).

[AT state]
The number of AT start games is determined in the game in the AT preparation state (the game for determining the number of AT start games), and when the game in the AT preparation state ends, the specific number of games (second unit number of games: number of AT start games + additional AT games) A game in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as "AT game") in which the push order of the small winning combination is notified over the number) is started.

In the AT game (notification game), a pseudo BB lottery is performed every game based on the internal winning combination, and when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process, and the pseudo BB game is digested. Then, the sub-game state returns to the AT state. At this time, the number of AT games (the number of AT games) is not counted (subtracted) during the interrupt period of the pseudo BB game.

Further, in the AT game, an additional lottery for the number of AT games is performed based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the AT game, when the "loss", "reach eye lip" or "rare role" is internally won once, or when the "loss" or "normal lip" is continuously won. In some cases, an additional lottery is performed for the number of AT games. Then, when the additional lottery of the number of AT games is won, the number of additional AT games (0 to 300 games) corresponding to the winning result is added to the number of AT games currently remaining (the number of remaining AT games).

Further, in the AT game, a predetermined symbol combination (in this embodiment, "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" or "black cherry"-"black BAR"-"black BAR") is on the effective line. When the stop display is displayed, the sub-game state shifts to the "W chance state". Then, after the game in the "W chance state" is digested, the AT game is restarted. The number of AT games is not counted (subtracted) during the game period of the "W chance state".

In the "W chance state", a game is played in which an increase in medal payout can be expected. In the "W chance state" game, the end condition is not the number of digested games, but is performed when a specific small role ("CT bell" capable of paying out 10 medals in this embodiment) is internally won. It is defined by the number of times the stop button is pressed in the order of navigation (hereinafter referred to as "the number of bell navigations"). That is, in the game in the "W chance state", the end condition is managed by the number of bell navigations, and when the number of bell navigations reaches a predetermined number, the game in the "W chance state" ends. In this embodiment, the number of bell navigations in the "W chance state" game is set to five.

Further, in the AT game, when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (in the present embodiment, "yellow BAR"-"yellow BAR"-on the center line (effective line) or on the cross-up. (When "Yellow BAR" is complete), the sub-game state shifts to the "additional challenge state". Then, after the game in the "additional challenge state" is digested, the AT game is restarted.

In addition, in the game of the "additional challenge state", the pseudo BB game is won and stocked with a high probability over a predetermined number of games. In addition, the number of AT games is not counted (subtracted) during the play period of the "additional challenge state".

Further, when the AT game is completed, the sub-game state always shifts to the transition effect state, and the above-mentioned transition effect game (race effect) is performed. In this case, the information regarding the type of the ally character who is the target (candidate) for winning the race in the race production of the transition production game and the content of the race production regarding the race win rate of the ally character is provided at the start of the game in the AT state before the transition. Determined by lottery.

The operation control of the AT game described above is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (assist time game control means) for controlling the operation of the AT game.

[Pseudo BB state]
In the pseudo BB game (special game), a specific replay combination (any of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8") is won, and the stop button pressing order is associated with the winning replay combination. When the push order is predetermined (when the push order is correct), a game called "JACGAME" (specific game) in which an increase in medal payout can be expected is executed.

In the game of "JACGAME", the end condition is not the number of digestion games, but the stop button that is performed when a specific small role ("CT bell" that can pay out 10 medals in this embodiment) is internally won. It is defined by the number of push order navigations (number of bell navigations). That is, in the game of "JACGAME", the end condition is managed by the number of times of bell navigation, and when the number of times of bell navigation reaches a specific number of times, the game of "JACGAME" ends. In the present embodiment, the specific number of times of bell navigation in "JACGAME" is set to 5.

Further, the game period in the pseudo BB state is divided into a period called "JACGAME guaranteed section" and a period called "JACIN challenge section" to be performed after that.

In the "JACGAME guaranteed section", the game is always continued (the period is indefinite) until the predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment) of "JACGAME" is consumed. Then, in the "JACGAME guaranteed section", when a specific replay combination (any of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8") is won, the pressing order of the stop button associated with the winning replay combination is achieved. Is notified (navigation), and the execution of "JACGAME" is guaranteed.

The game mode of the "JACGAME guaranteed section" is the same regardless of the transition route of the sub-game state to the pseudo BB state. That is, the game mode of the "JACGAME guaranteed section" is the same regardless of whether the sub-game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state or the sub-game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state. On the other hand, the game form of the "JACIN challenge section" differs depending on the transition route of the sub-game state to the pseudo BB state.

In the game of the "JACIN challenge section" when the sub-game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, a specific replay combination (a specific number of games: 10 games in the present embodiment) is used. In the game in which "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8") is won, a two-choice challenge effect is performed in the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. Then, if the correct answer is given to the two-choice challenge effect, "JACGAME" is executed as an interrupt process (interrupt game).

On the other hand, in the game of the "JACIN challenge section" when the sub-game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, a specific replay combination ("normal rip") is performed during a period of a specific number of games (10 games in this embodiment). In the game in which any one of "1" to "normal lip 8" is won, the pressing order of the stop button associated with the winning replay combination is always notified (navigation). That is, when the sub-game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, "JACGAME" is always executed as an interrupt process if a specific replay combination is won in the "JACIN challenge section". Therefore, in this case, more medals can be obtained as compared with the case where the sub-game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state.

Further, in the pseudo BB game when the sub-game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, the cycle of the game period in the non-AT state is based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. A shortened lottery will be held. Specifically, in the pseudo BB game when the sub game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, when the "loss", "reach eye lip" or "rare role" is hit once internally, or When the "loss" or "normal lip" is won continuously, the cycle shortening lottery is performed. Then, if the cycle shortening lottery is won, a predetermined number of shortened games (0 to 170 games) corresponding to the winning result is subtracted from the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set. That is, even in the pseudo BB state, there is a possibility that the privilege of shortening the game period in the non-AT state of the current cycle can be obtained.

Further, in the pseudo BB game, when the cycle shortening lottery is won and the result of subtracting the number of shortened games from the current number of remaining games of the normal game is less than "0", the absolute value of the number of games of the subtraction result is determined. It is stocked as the number of shortened games for the surplus in the current set. Then, the number of stocked surplus shortened games is applied at the start of the normal game of the next set, and at that time, the game period in the non-AT state (normal state) is shortened.

On the other hand, in the pseudo BB game when the sub-game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, an additional lottery for the number of AT games is performed based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. .. Specifically, in the pseudo BB game when the sub game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, when the "loss", "reach eye lip" or "rare role" is hit once internally, or " If "Loss" or "Normal Lip" is won in succession, the number of AT games will be added to the lottery. Then, if the additional lottery is won, a predetermined number of additional AT games (0 to 300 games) corresponding to the winning result is added to the current number of remaining AT games. That is, even in the pseudo BB state, there is a possibility that the privilege of adding the number of AT games can be obtained.

The pseudo BB game and the operation control of the "JACGAME" described above are executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (special game control means and specific game control means) for controlling the operation of the pseudo BB game and the "JACGAME".

<Structure of data table stored in ROM cartridge board>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described. The correspondence between the abbreviations of the internal winning combinations used in the various processes controlled by the sub CPU 102 and the various tables managed by the sub CPU 102 and the above-mentioned names and abbreviations of the internal winning combinations managed by the main CPU 93, which will be described below, is shown in FIG. 32. It is as shown in the correspondence table of.

[Race runner MAP lottery table]
First, the race runner MAP lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the configuration of the race runner MAP lottery table. The race runner MAP lottery table is, for example, the race runner MAP during the race information lottery process (see FIG. 86 described later) performed at the start of one cycle of the non-AT state (normal game start). It is referred to in the lottery process (S321) and the like.

The race runner MAP lottery table defines the correspondence between the race runner MAP MAP numbers (“1” to “39”) and the lottery value. As will be described later, the race runner MAP (race information MAP) is a race victory target for the race production from the current cycle of the non-AT state to the 5th cycle (from the 1st race to the 5th race). Data ("1" to "10") for determining the candidate) person is defined.

In the race runner MAP lottery process using the race runner MAP lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is raced. The lottery value corresponding to each race runner MAP number specified in the runner MAP lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the MAP number of the race runner MAP at that time has been won. For example, in the race runner MAP lottery process, the probability of winning the MAP number "1" is 1974/32768.

[Race information MAP data table]
Next, the race information MAP data table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the structure of the race information MAP data table. The race information MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the data acquisition process (S323) of the "target table" in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 86 described later) described later.

In the race information MAP data table, from the current cycle to the fifth cycle for each MAP number of the race runner MAP (race information MAP) determined by the race runner MAP lottery process using the race runner MAP lottery table. Data (“1” to “10”: hereinafter referred to as race information MAP data) for determining the race winners (from the first race to the fifth race) are defined. The race information MAP data is data corresponding to the type of "target table" defined in the winning target person lottery table (see FIG. 35 described later) described later. Specifically, the race information MAP data "1" to "10" correspond to "target table A" to "target table J" defined in the winning target person lottery table described later, respectively.

In the data acquisition process of the "target table" using the race information MAP data table, for example, when the MAP number of the race runner MAP (race information MAP) is "7", the first race to the fifth race As race information MAP data, "2" (target table B), "1" (target table A), "2" (target table B), "1" (target table A), "8" (target table H), respectively. ) Is acquired.

[Victory target lottery table]
Next, the winning target lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the configuration of a winning target lottery table. The winning target person lottery table is referred to, for example, in the winning target person lottery process (S325) in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 86 described later) described later.

The winner lottery table is for each type of target table, and the race winners ("male A", "male B", "female A", "kappa", "tengu") of the race production performed in the transition production game. And "male A / male B") and its lottery value are defined. In this embodiment, since the race production of the transition production game is performed even after the end of the AT game, the target table determined by the race information MAP data table is set in the winning target person lottery table as shown in FIG. 35. In addition to A to J, a dedicated table "after AT" is also specified.

In the winning target lottery process using the winning target lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected as the winning target person. The lottery value corresponding to each race winner specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "digit" occurs), it means that the race winner at that time has won.

For example, when the target table A is referred to in the winning target lottery process (when the race information MAP data is "1"), the probability that "Kappa" will be the race winning target is 328/32768. Become. However, for example, when the target table G is referred to in the winning target lottery process (when the race information MAP data is "7"), the probability that "Kappa" will be the race winning target is 0 /. It will be 32768, and "Kappa" will not win the race.

[Race win rate MAP lottery table]
Next, the race win rate MAP lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the configuration of a race win rate MAP lottery table. The race win rate MAP lottery table is referred to, for example, in the race win rate MAP lottery process (S327) in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 86 described later) described later.

The race win rate MAP lottery table defines the correspondence between the race win rate MAP and the lottery value for each set value (1 to 6). In this embodiment, as the race win rate MAP, "race win rate 5%", "race win rate 10%", "race win rate 20%", "race win rate 30%",
"Race win rate 50%", "Race win rate 66%", "Race win rate 80%", "Race win rate 100%", "Race win rate 2nd race 50%"-"Race win rate 5th race 50%", "Race" Twenty types are provided: "Win rate 2nd race 66%" to "Race win rate 5th race 66%" and "Race win rate 2nd race 80%" to "Race win rate 5th race 80%".

In the race win rate MAP lottery process using the race win rate MAP lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as the race win rate MAP. The lottery value corresponding to each race win rate MAP specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the race win rate MAP at that time is won. For example, when the set value is "1", the probability that the race win rate MAP of "race win rate 5th race 50%" will be won is 4410/32768.

[Race win rate MAP data table]
Next, the race win rate MAP data table will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the structure of the race win rate MAP data table. Further, FIG. 38 is obtained by rewriting the race win rate data (“1” to “8”) defined in the race win rate MAP data table shown in FIG. 37 into a specific win rate value (percentage display). The race win rate MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the race win rate data acquisition process (S329) in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 86 described later) described later.

In the race win rate MAP data table, predetermined race win rate data ("1" to "8") is stored for each race win rate MAP determined by the race win rate MAP lottery process. The race win rate data "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7" and "8" have a win rate of 5%, a win rate of 10% and a win rate of 20, respectively. %, Win rate 30%, Win rate 50%, Win rate 66%, Win rate 80% and Win rate 100%.

Specifically, the race win rate MAP is "race win rate 5%", "race win rate 10%", "race win rate 20%", "race win rate 30%", "race win rate 50%", "race win rate 66%". , "Race win rate 80%" and "Race win rate 100%", only the race win rate data of the race production of the current cycle (first race) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. If the race win rate MAP is any of "race win rate 2nd race 50%", "race win rate 2nd race 66%" and "race win rate 2nd race 80%", the first race and 2 The race win rate data for the first race (the race one cycle ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. If the race win rate MAP is any of "race win rate 3rd race 50%", "race win rate 3rd race 66%" and "race win rate 3rd race 80%", the race win rate is 3 from the first race. The race win rate data up to the race (the race two cycles ahead) is specified in the race win rate MAP data table. If the race win rate MAP is any of "race win rate 4th race 50%", "race win rate 4th race 66%" and "race win rate 4th race 80%", the race win rate is 4 from the first race. The race win rate data up to the third race (the race three cycles ahead) is specified in the race win rate MAP data table. Further, if the race win rate MAP is any of "race win rate 5th race 50%", "race win rate 5th race 66%" and "race win rate 5th race 80%", 5 from the 1st race. The race win rate data up to the race (the race four cycles ahead) is specified in the race win rate MAP data table.

Then, in the process of acquiring the race win rate data using the race win rate MAP data table, for example, when the race win rate MAP is "race win rate 5th race 50%", the race win rate data of the 1st race to the 5th race As a result, "2" (win rate 10%), "2" (win rate 10%), "2" (win rate 10%), "2" (win rate 10%), and "5" (win rate 50%) are acquired, respectively. To.

[Lace result lottery table]
Next, the race result lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. 39 to 41 are diagrams showing the configuration of the race result lottery table. The race result lottery table is referred to, for example, in the race result lottery process (S644) during the race-game start processing (see FIG. 111 described later) described later.

The race result lottery table defines the correspondence between the race result (winning / non-winning) and the lottery value for each race winning percentage.

In the race result lottery process using the race result lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is extracted in the race result lottery table. The lottery value corresponding to each race result (winning / non-winning) specified in 1 is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "digit" occurs), the race result at that time is won.

Here, the number of medals paid out corresponding to the internal winning combination related to the bell in one cycle (190 games in the present embodiment) in the non-AT state is defined as the “number of bell payouts during the cycle”. The number of bells paid out during this cycle is counted (counted) using the number of bells paid out during the cycle in S862 of the general small and medium-sized combination_winning process described later.

The race result lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 39 is referred to when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is equal to or greater than the first value (“42” in the present embodiment). In the race result lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 40, the number of bell payouts during the cycle is equal to or greater than the second value (“27” in the present embodiment) and the first value (“42” in the present embodiment). Referenced if less than. Further, the race result lottery table (No. 3) shown in FIG. 41 is referred to when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is less than the second value (“27” in the present embodiment).

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is less than the second value (“27” in the present embodiment) (see FIG. 41), the number of bell payouts during the cycle is the second value. There is a higher probability that the race result will be won than in the above cases (see FIGS. 40 and 41). Further, when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is less than the first value (see FIGS. 40 and 41), the race result is higher than when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is greater than or equal to the first value (see FIG. 39). There is a high probability that you will win. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is less than the predetermined value, the race result is won (AT win) than when the number of bell payouts during the cycle is equal to or more than the predetermined value. The probability is high.

[Post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a configuration of a post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table. The post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table is referred to, for example, in the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery process (S716) during the post-AT _ game start processing (see FIG. 114 described later) described later. To.

The post-AT race win expectation data selection lottery table defines the correspondence between the race win rate and the lottery value. The post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table is commonly referred to regardless of the set values (1 to 6).

In the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery process using the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The extracted random number values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery values corresponding to each winning rate defined in the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the winning percentage at that time is won. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the race win rates selected after AT are "win rate 5%", "win rate 10%", "win rate 30%", "win rate 50%" and "win rate 100". % ”.

[Pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table]
Next, the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table. The pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table is referred to, for example, when the sub-game state is the normal state in the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 106 described later) described later.

The pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the pseudo BB game and the lottery value for each type of the internal winning combination.

In the pseudo BB lottery process using the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is simulated. The lottery value of each lottery result specified in the BB lottery (general middle) table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result (winning / non-winning of the pseudo BB game) at that time is won.

For example, in the pseudo BB lottery process using the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table, when the internal winning combination is "normal lip", the non-winning of the pseudo BB game is always determined, and the internal winning combination is "determined". In the case of "role", the winning of the pseudo BB game is always determined.

[Pseudo BB lottery (during AT / preparing / racing) table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a pseudo BB lottery (during AT / preparing / racing) table will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo BB lottery (during AT, during AT preparation, during race) table. The pseudo BB lottery (during AT, during AT preparation, during race) table is, for example, when the sub-game state is other than the normal state in the pseudo-BB lottery process (see FIG. 106 described later) described later (sub-game state). Is in the AT state, AT preparation state, or transition effect state).

The pseudo BB lottery (during AT / preparing / racing) table also has the same configuration as the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table, and the pseudo BB lottery process is performed by the same method. Therefore, here, the configuration of the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / preparing / racing) table and the method of the pseudo BB lottery processing using the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / preparing / racing) table will be described. Is omitted.

[Pseudo BB precursor lottery table]
Next, the pseudo BB precursor lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo BB precursor lottery table. The pseudo BB precursor lottery table is referred to, for example, in the pseudo BB precursor lottery process (S587) in the pseudo BB lottery process described later (see FIG. 106 described later).

The pseudo BB precursor lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of precursor games (including no precursor) at the time of winning the pseudo BB game and the lottery value for each type of internal winning combination.

In the pseudo BB precursor lottery process using the pseudo BB precursor lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used as a pseudo BB precursor. The lottery value of each precursor game number specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of precursor games at that time has been won.

For example, in the pseudo BB precursor lottery process using the pseudo BB precursor lottery table, if the internal winning combination is "weak che", the number of precursor games of one game is won with a probability of 128/32768, and 512/32768. The probability of winning is the number of precursor games of 2 games, and the probability of 32128/32768 is the number of precursor games of 3 games.

[Cycle shortening lottery table]
Next, the cycle shortening lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the configuration of the cycle shortening lottery table (No. 1), and FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the configuration of the cycle shortening lottery table (No. 2). The cycle shortening lottery table (No. 1 and No. 2) is referred to, for example, in the cycle shortening related process (S570) in the process at the start of the general game (see FIGS. 104 and 105 described later) described later.

The cycle shortening lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of shortened games (the number of subtracted games of normal games) in the non-AT state game period (1 cycle) and the lottery value for each winning history data of the internal winning combination. .. In the cycle shortening lottery table, the number of shortened games is "0", "5", "10", "20", "30", "40", "50", "60", "70", "70". "100", "150" and "170" are provided.

The winning history data "Loss 2 consecutive" of the internal winning combination in the cycle shortening lottery table (No. 1) indicates a case where the internal winning combination "Loss" has won two games in a row. The winning history data "3 rips" indicates a case where the internal winning combination "normal rip" wins 3 games in a row. Further, the winning history data "3 bells" indicates a case where the internal winning combination "3 bells" (3 bells on the left and 3 bells on the middle right) wins 3 games in a row.

In addition, the winning history data "weak 1st shot" and "strong 1st shot" of the internal winning combination in the cycle shortening lottery table (2) shows that the internal winning combination of the current game is "weak che" and "strong", respectively. The case of "Che" is shown. The winning history data "weak and weak 2 consecutive" indicates the case where the internal winning role "weak che" has won 2 games in a row, and the winning history data "strong and strong 2 consecutive" is the internal winning role "strong che". Shows the case where two games are won in a row. The winning history data "weak and strong 2 consecutive" indicates the case where the internal winning roles "weak che" and "strong che" are consecutively won in this order, and the winning history data "strong and weak 2 consecutive" is the internal winning. It shows the case where the roles "strong che" and "weak che" are consecutively won in this order. In addition, the winning history data "3 rare roles" is the internal winning role "rare role" ("weak che", "strong che", "watermelon", "chance eye A", "chance eye B" and "fixed role". ": The specified internal winning combination) indicates the case where three games are won in a row.

In the cycle shortening related processing using the cycle shortening lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is put into the cycle shortening lottery table. The lottery value of each specified number of shortened games is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of shortened games at that time is won.

For example, in the cycle shortening related processing using the cycle shortening lottery table, when the winning history data is "3 lost games", the number of shortened games of 10 games is won with a probability of 30720/32768, and 1600/32768. Win the number of shortened games with a probability of 30 games, and win the number of shortened games with a probability of 50 games with a probability of 448/32768. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the internal winning combination "loss" is continuously won in the normal game, there is a possibility that the privilege of acquiring the number of shortened games (shortening the game period in the non-AT state) can be obtained.

[Pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table]
Next, a pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table. The pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table is referred to, for example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process (S598) in the general middle BB_game start processing (see FIG. 107 described later) described later.

In the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table, the correspondence relationship between the number of shortened games (the number of subtracted games of normal games) in the non-AT state game period (1 cycle) and the lottery value for each internal winning combination or its winning history data. To specify. In the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, "0", "5", "10", "20", "30", "50", "100" and "170" are provided as the number of shortened games. However, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process, if "170" is won as the number of shortened games, a privilege of 100% race win rate can be obtained.

In the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is simulated. The lottery value of each shortened game number specified in the BB cycle shortened lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of shortened games at that time is won.

For example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, if the winning history data is "three lost games", the number of shortened games of 30 games is won with a probability of 32112/32768. Win the number of shortened games of 100 games with a probability of 656/32768. That is, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo BB game is started during the normal game, the number of shortened games is acquired (in the non-AT state) even if the internal winning combination "loss" is continuously won in the pseudo BB game state. There is a possibility that you can get the benefit of shortening the game period). Further, for example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, when the internal winning combination is "reach eye lip", not only the number of shortened games of 170 games is always won, but also the number of shortened games is not always won. The race win rate set in the current set will be updated to 100% race win rate (AT win confirmed).

[Directly placed lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the direct-mounted lottery table will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table placed directly on the table. The direct addition lottery table is referred to when determining the number of additional AT games in, for example, the direct addition lottery processing (S734) during the BB_game start processing (see FIG. 115 described later) during AT described later. ..

The direct addition lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of additional AT games and the lottery value for each internal winning combination or its winning history data. In the present embodiment, the number of additional AT games is "0" (without addition), "10", "20", "30", "50", "100", "150", "200" and "200". 300 ”is provided.

In the direct addition lottery process using the direct addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is placed on the direct addition lottery table. The lottery value of each additional AT game specified is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of additional AT games at that time is won.

For example, in the direct addition lottery process using the direct addition lottery table, if the winning history data is "three lost games", there is a probability of 32736/32768 to win the number of additional AT games of 20 games, 32/32768. Win the number of additional AT games with a probability of 100 games. That is, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo BB game is started during the AT game, even if the internal winning combination "loss" is continuously won in the pseudo BB game state, the privilege of adding the number of AT games can be obtained. there is a possibility.

[AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table]
Next, the AT start game number lottery (at the time of winning the kappa) table will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. 50 to 53 are diagrams showing the configurations of the AT start game number lottery (Kappa win) table (No. 1) to the AT start game number lottery (Kappa win) table (No. 4), respectively. It should be noted that these AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table is referred to, for example, in the Kappa Sushi MAP lottery processing (S683) during the later-described Kappa victory_game start processing (see FIG. 113 described later). To.

The AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table defines the correspondence between the sushi MAP number and the lottery value for each sushi MAP number currently set. The sushi MAP corresponds to the sushi material from the first dish to the first dish displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the above-mentioned kappa sushi production (game for determining the number of AT start games when "Kappa" wins). It is a MAP that defines the data (see FIG. 54 described later).

In addition, "1" to "45" are specified as the sushi MAP numbers on the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table. Further, since the sushi MAP is not set in the initial state, in this case, the lottery value in the "first time" column in the AT start game number lottery (at the time of winning the kappa) table is referred to (see FIG. 53).

In the Kawado sushi MAP lottery process using the AT start game number lottery (when Kawado wins) table, first, the random number extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each sushi MAP number specified in the AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kawado victory) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the sushi MAP number at that time has been won.

[Kappa Sushi MAP Data Table]
Next, the Kappa Sushi MAP data table will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the structure of the Kappa Sushi MAP data table. The Kappa Sushi MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the Kappa Sushi MAP data acquisition process (S684) during the Kappa Victory_Game Start process (see FIG. 113 described later) described later.

In the Kawado sushi MAP data table, the Kawado sushi MAP data (“1” to “1” to “1” to “1” to “1” to the sushi material corresponding to the sushi material specified for each sushi MAP number determined by the Kawado sushi MAP lottery process 8 ") is stored. That is, the Kappa sushi MAP data table is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT start game number determination game (Kappa sushi production) performed when "Kappa" wins in the race production of the transition production game. The types of sushi ingredients from the first game to the tenth game are specified.

In the Kawado sushi MAP data table, the sushi material corresponding to the Kawado sushi MAP data "1" is "squid", and the sushi material corresponding to the Kawado sushi MAP data "2" is "tamago". The sushi material corresponding to the data "3" is "Kadomaki", and the sushi material corresponding to the Kawado sushi MAP data "4" is "Salmon". The sushi material corresponding to the Kawado sushi MAP data "5" is "Ikura", and the sushi material corresponding to the Kawado sushi MAP data "6" is "Tuna", which corresponds to the Kawado sushi MAP data "7". The sushi material is "Uni", and the sushi material corresponding to Kawado Sushi MAP data "8" is "Ise Ebi".

Then, in the Kawado sushi MAP data acquisition process using the Kawado sushi MAP data table, for example, when the sushi MAP number is "1", the Kawado sushi MAP data for the first to tenth dishes are "1". 1 "(squid)," 1 "(squid)," 2 "(tamago)," 1 "(squid)," 4 "(salmon)," 1 "(squid)," 2 "(tamago)," 1 " "(Squid)," 1 "(squid) and" 5 "(squid) are acquired.

[Kappa game number acquisition lottery table]
Next, a lottery table for acquiring the number of kappa games will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the configuration of a kappa game number acquisition lottery table. The kappa game number acquisition lottery table is referred to, for example, in the kappa game number acquisition lottery process (S696) during the kappa victory time_game start process (see FIG. 113 described later) described later.

The Kappa game number acquisition lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of AT start games at the time of Kappa victory and the lottery value for each Kappa sushi MAP data (“1” to “8”). In the present embodiment, "10", "20", "30", "100", "150", "200" and "300" are provided as the number of AT start games when the kappa wins. Further, in the Kappa game number acquisition lottery table, a lottery value of "LIFE up" is also defined for each Kappa Sushi MAP data ("1" to "8"). When the "LIFE up" is won, the value of the kappa end counter that manages the end trigger of the kappa sushi production (AT start game number determination game) is added by "1".

In the Kawado game number acquisition lottery process using the Kawado game number acquisition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used for Kawado. Number of games The number of each AT start game specified in the lottery table or the lottery value of "LIFE up" is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of AT start games or “LIFE up” at that time has been won.

For example, if the set kappa sushi MAP data is "1" (squid) and the video effect of "kappa" eating the sushi material "squid" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, a lottery for acquiring the number of kappa games. In the lottery process for acquiring the number of kappa games using the table, the number of AT start games of 10 games is won with a probability of 32672/32768, and the number of AT start games of 300 games with a probability of 96/32768 is won. Further, for example, when the set kappa sushi MAP data is "3" (kappa roll) and the video effect of "kappa" eating the sushi material "kappa roll" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the kappa is displayed. In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the game number acquisition lottery table, the number of AT start games is not won, but "LIFE up" is always won.

Further, for example, when the set Kappa sushi MAP data is "8" (Ise Ebi) and the image effect of "Kappa" eating the sushi material "Ise Ebi" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the Kappa In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the game number acquisition lottery table, the number of AT start games of 100 games is won with a probability of 27854/32768, and the number of AT start games of 150, 200 or 300 games with a probability of 1638/32768. Wins. That is, in the present embodiment, in the Kappa sushi production performed when "Kappa" wins in the race production of the transition production game, when the production of "Kappa" eating sushi material of high-quality ingredients is performed, it is more likely. Win a large number of AT start games.

[Kappa Sushi data conversion generation lottery table]
Next, the Kappa Sushi data conversion generation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table for generating Kappa Sushi data conversion. The Kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery table is referred to, for example, in the Kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery processing (S692) during the Kappa victorious_game start processing (see FIG. 113 described later) described later.

The Kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the Kappa sushi data conversion generation and the lottery value for each type of internal winning combination.

In the Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery process using the Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected. , Kawado sushi data conversion occurrence The lottery value of each lottery result specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery process using the Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery table, if the internal winning combination is "missing", the Kawado sushi data conversion generation will be non-winning with a probability of 31130/32768. With a probability of 1638/32768, the occurrence of Kawado sushi data conversion is a win.

[Kappa Sushi data conversion lottery table]
Next, the Kappa Sushi data conversion lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. 57 to 61 are diagrams showing the configuration of a Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (1 dish ahead) table to a Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (5 dishes ahead) table, respectively.

The Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (1 dish ahead) table in FIG. 57 shows the sushi material (Kappa sushi MAP) displayed in the game one game ahead (second dish) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when the Kappa wins. Data) conversion lottery table. The Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (2 dishes) table shown in FIG. 58 is a sushi material conversion lottery table displayed in the game 2 games ahead (3 dishes) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when the Kappa wins. Is. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (three dishes) table shown in FIG. 59 is a sushi material conversion lottery table displayed in the game three games ahead (fourth dish) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when the kappa wins. Is. The Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (4 dishes) table shown in FIG. 60 is a sushi material conversion lottery table displayed in the game 4 games ahead (5th dish) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when Kappa wins. Is. Then, the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (5 dishes) table shown in FIG. 61 converts the sushi material displayed in the game 5 games ahead (6th dish) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game at the time of Kappa victory. It is a lottery table. Each Kappa sushi data conversion lottery table is referred to, for example, in the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery process (S694) during the Kappa victorious_game start process (see FIG. 113 described later) described later.

Each Kappa sushi data conversion lottery table has a correspondence relationship between the converted Kappa sushi MAP data ("1" to "8") and the lottery value for each Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) currently set. To specify.

In the Kawado sushi data conversion lottery process using each Kawado sushi data conversion lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used. The lottery value of each converted Kawado sushi MAP data (sushi material) specified in each Kawado sushi data conversion lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the converted Kappa Sushi MAP data (sushi material) at that time is won.

For example, in the Kawado sushi data conversion lottery process using the Kawado sushi data conversion lottery (one plate ahead) table, if the currently set Kawado sushi MAP data (sushi material) is "5" (tuna), With a probability of 29492/32768, Kawado sushi MAP data (sushi material) is converted from "5" (tuna) to "7" (uni), and with a probability of 3276/32768, Kawado sushi MAP data (sushi material) is "5". Converted from (tuna) to "8" (Ise shrimp).

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 61, in the present embodiment, the value of the converted Kappa sushi MAP data is not smaller than the value of the converted Kappa sushi MAP data in the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery process. That is, the number of acquired AT games after conversion is not smaller than the number of acquired AT games before conversion by the Kappa Sushi data conversion lottery process. However, for example, if the currently set Kawado sushi MAP data (sushi material) is "8" (Ise lobster), the Kawado sushi MAP data (sushi material) is not converted in the Kawado sushi data conversion lottery process. ..

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 75, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIG.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs the power-on processing (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization is performed according to the determination result. The details of the power-on processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 63 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area, which requires data to be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor (not shown) and the start switch 79 are checked. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the random value for the internal winning combination lottery, various random values (0 to 65535 and / or 0 to 255) for the production can be acquired, and if necessary, the production can be obtained. Various random values may be acquired in S4.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value for the internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop initial setting process (S6). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. It should be noted that the start command data includes various information necessary for the production of the internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs weight processing (S8). In this process, if a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 75 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Further, when it is decided to perform the reel effect (lock effect) during the reel acceleration period at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the reel effect pattern in the reel rotation start process of S9 and produces the reel effect. It also controls.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. By this process, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 uses the symbol combination displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12). ) And. Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal payout process (S14). In this process, the hopper device 51 is driven, the number of credits is updated, and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S13. At this time, in the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the display combination, but as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12), when the number of medals to be hung is three, the number of medals is The maximum number of payouts (upper limit of payout) is 10.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning operation command generation / storage process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a winning operation command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the winning operation command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. By this process, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game by referring to various counters (not shown) for managing the end trigger of the bonus game provided in the main RAM 95. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later. Then, when the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Processing when power is turned on]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the power-on processing performed in S1 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S21). In this determination process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal by performing error detection using the checksum value.

For example, when the power is turned off, the set value of pachislot 1 (the value set for one of the six predetermined ball output rates) and the checksum value calculated from the set value are stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 95 as backup data. It is stored. In the process of S21, the main CPU 93 reads out the set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95. Next, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum value calculated from the read set value with the backed up checksum value. Then, if the sum values of the two match, the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal.

In S21, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal (when the determination in S21 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S23 described later. On the other hand, in S21, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal (when the determination in S21 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backed up set value in a predetermined area in the main RAM 95 (S22). As a result, if the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 95.

After the processing of S22 or when the determination in S21 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch (not shown) is in the ON state (S23). In S23, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (when the determination in S23 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S29 described later.

On the other hand, in S23, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is in the ON state (when the determination in S23 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a predetermined initialization process at the time of setting change (S24). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 95, and also clears the set value.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization command generation / storage process (S25). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for an initialization command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the initialization command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. The initialization command data includes whether or not the set value has been changed, set value information, and the like.

After the process of S25, the main CPU 93 executes the set value change process (S26). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a set value from predetermined 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and sets a value based on the operation result of the start lever 23 operated thereafter. To confirm.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch is in the ON state (S27).

In S27, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is in the ON state (when the determination in S27 is YES), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S27. If the setting change switch is in the ON state, it means that the operation of the setting change switch is not completed. In this case, the main CPU 93 processes S27 until the setting change switch is not in the ON state. repeat.

On the other hand, in S27, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (when the determination in S27 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the initialization command generation / storage process (S28). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for an initialization command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Then, after the processing of S28, the main CPU 93 ends the power-on processing and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

Here, returning to the process of S23 again, when the determination in S23 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S29).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S29 that the backup is normal (when the determination in S29 is YES), the main CPU 93 returns the set value to the state before the power failure based on the backup data (S30). Then, after the processing of S30, the main CPU 93 ends the power-on processing and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, in S29, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal (when the determination in S29 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs power-on error processing (S31). In this process, the main CPU 93 displays that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like.

In the present embodiment, an error (backup error) that occurs when the backup is not normal is configured so that it cannot be canceled by operating the stop release switch or the reset switch, and a new setting change is made. It will be released.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic input request (S41). The presence / absence of the automatic closing request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request.

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

In S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic input request (when the determination in S41 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S44 described later. On the other hand, in S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic closing request (when the determination in S41 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the automatic closing process (S42). In this process, the value of the automatic input counter is copied to the input number counter, and then the value of the automatic input counter is cleared.

After the process of S42, the main CPU 93 performs the medal insertion command generation and storage process (S43). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. The medal insertion command data includes information such as the number of medals inserted.

After the processing of S43, or when the determination in S41 is NO, the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S44). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 20 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper device 51.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S45). Specifically, when the gaming state is a non-MB gaming state (including the inter-flag state), the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of input sheets to "3". Further, when the gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of input sheets to "2".

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a MAXBET input process (S46). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether the MAX bet operation is valid / invalid based on the game state, the number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number). The details of the MAXBET input process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S47). When it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 is not permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S52 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 is permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S47 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S48). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and if a medal has been inserted, adds "1" to the value of the inserted number counter.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S49). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal can be inserted or credited (S50). When the main CPU 93 determines in S50 that the medal can be inserted or credited (when the determination in S50 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S52 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S50 that the main CPU 93 is not in a state where medals can be inserted or credited (when the determination in S50 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S51). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 32.

After the processing of S51, if S47 is a NO determination or S50 is a YES determination, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S52). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is set to "1" or more.

In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S46 and repeats the processes after S46. On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is on (S53). ).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S53 that the start switch 79 is not on (when the determination in S53 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S46 and repeats the processes after S46. On the other hand, in S53, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 79 is ON (when the determination in S53 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S54).

Then, after the processing of S54, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check processing, and shifts the processing to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

[MAXBET input processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the MAXBET insertion process performed in S46 during the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIG. 64) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MAX bet operation has been performed (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MAX bet button 21 has been pressed by the player.

When the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the MAX bet operation has not been performed (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion process and performs the medal acceptance / start check process (FIG. 64). (See), move to S47.

On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MAX bet operation has been performed (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "2MB" or "3MB" is established (winning). Determine (S62). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the 2MB flag-to-flag state or the 3MB-flag-to-flag state with reference to the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 26).

In S62, when the main CPU 93 determines that "2MB" or "3MB" is not established (winning) (when the determination in S62 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S65 described later. On the other hand, in S62, when the main CPU 93 determines that "2MB" or "3MB" is established (winning) (when the determination in S62 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits. It is determined whether or not the total with (the number of stored sheets) is "3" or more (S63).

In S63, when the main CPU 93 determines that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is not "3" or more (when the determination in S63 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the MAXBET insertion process. After finishing, the process is moved to S47 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIG. 64).

On the other hand, in S63, when the main CPU 93 determines that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is "3" or more (when the determination in S63 is YES), the main CPU 93 is multiplied. Set "3" to the number of sheets (S64). Then, after the processing of S64, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET input processing, and shifts the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 64).

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the player performs the MAX bet operation in the 2MB flag state or the 3MB flag state, the total number of medals inserted and the credit number is multiplied by the MB flag state. If the maximum number of medals is less than "3", the number of medals to be hung is not set. That is, in this case, the MAX betting operation performed by the player becomes invalid.

Here, returning to the process of S62 again, when the determination in S62 is NO, the main CPU 93 is set with a predetermined number of credited medals (S65). At this time, one, two, or three pieces are set. Then, after the processing of S65, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET input processing, and shifts the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 64).

As described above, in the MAXBET insertion process of the present embodiment, when the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is less than "3" in the state between MB flags, the player's MAX The betting operation is treated as invalid, and this processing is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 has a total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) less than "3" in the state between the MB flags, and the player's MAX bet. It also serves as a means (bet operation invalidation means) for invalidating the MAX bet operation of the player when the operation is detected.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game state is the MB game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) (S71).

In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the MB gaming state (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the MB operating process (S72). As shown in the internal lottery tables for the 2MB gaming state and the 3MB gaming state in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the MB gaming state, the “CB combination”, that is, all the small combinations are always won. Therefore, in the MB operation process, the main CPU 93 turns on all the small winning combination bits in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 24). Then, after the processing of S72, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S6 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the MB gaming state (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state (S73). In this process, the main CPU 93 grasps the current game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27), and determines the type of the internal lottery table.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a random number value for internal lottery stored in the random number value storage area (S74). Then, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value for the internal lottery (S75).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S75 is less than "0" (negative value) (S76). In S76, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is less than "0" (when the determination in S76 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S79 described later.

On the other hand, in S76, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than "0" (when the determination in S76 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S77). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is used as a random value, and the winning number is added by "1".

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S78). When it is determined in S78 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S78 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S75 and repeats the processes after S75.

On the other hand, in S78, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S78 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S80 described later.

Here, returning to the processing of S76 again, if S76 is a YES determination (when a digit is generated in the subtraction processing), the main CPU 93 is a small winning combination / replay data pointer corresponding to the winning number in which the digit is generated. And the bonus data pointer is acquired (S79).

After the processing of S79 or when the determination of S78 is YES, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 13 to 15 and the like), and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S80). Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S81).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (S82). In S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not "00000000000" (when the determination in S82 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S87 described later.

On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (when the determination in S82 is YES), the main CPU 93 uses the internal lottery table (FIGS. 13 to 13). Refer to (see 15 etc.) and acquire the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer (S83).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S84).

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the carry-over combination storage area and determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is being carried over (S85). When the main CPU 93 determines in S85 that the MB is not being carried over (when the determination in S85 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S87 described later.

On the other hand, in S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is being carried over (when the determination in S85 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT gaming state corresponding to the type of the MB being carried over (S86). .. Specifically, when "2MB" is being carried over (between the 2MB flags), the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 gaming state as the RT state (bit 3 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27)). Store (set) "1" in. On the other hand, when "3MB" is being carried over (between the 3MB flags), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 gaming state as the RT state ("1" in bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27). Is stored (set)).

After the processing of S86, or when S82 or S85 determines NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S87). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S6 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

As described above, the internal lottery process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means for executing the determination process of the internal winning combination (internal winning combination determining means). Further, in S86 during the internal lottery process described above, the RT gaming state corresponding to the type of MB being carried over is shifted. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (replay time state control means) for controlling the transition of the RT game state.

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the MB gaming state (S91).

In S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the MB gaming state (when the determination in S91 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S93 described later. On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the MB gaming state (when the determination in S91 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer as the rotation stop number. (S92).

After the processing of S92 or when the determination of S91 is YES, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and corresponds to the spinning stop number based on the acquired spinning stop number. Acquire various information (S93). In this process, the number of the stop table of the reels used during the first stop to the third stop and the information necessary for the control change process (when the reels are stopped in a specific order and the reels are stopped at a specific position). Information for reselecting the stop table) and the like are acquired again.

The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the reel stop number and various information such as the pull-in priority table selection data and the pull-in priority table number, which will be described later. Further, the stop table is a table that directly or indirectly defines information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position of the stop button. In this stop table, the number of sliding pieces is used so that the reel stops at the stop position intended by the designer so as not to give a disadvantage to the player and to cause an erroneous winning by using the specified information. Is stipulated.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) (S94).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S95). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 62). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S11 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 stores the value of the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 95 (S101). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S102). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects, for example, a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as the search target reel.

For example, in the process of S102, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S111 described later are performed on the left reel 3L, and when returning to S102 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S111, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S102 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S103). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the position data of the search symbol and sets "20" as the number of symbol checks (S104). Then, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code storage process (S105). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the position data of the current search symbol located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of effective lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 25) based on the symbol code acquired in S105 and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) (S106). At this point, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol.

In the present embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, which is prepared in advance, or the displayable combination may be acquired from the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 93 gives priority to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 25) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. Refer to the ranking table (not shown) to acquire the pull-in priority data.

The pull-in priority table is a table that defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority data for each storage area type in each pull-in priority table number and the predetermined priority. The pull-in priority table is used to search whether or not a more appropriate number of slip pieces exists in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order in which the symbols are preferentially stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Normally, the order of priority is set in the order of replay, small win, and bonus from the highest.

Further, in the case of a symbol position that would result in an erroneous winning when stopped, "use prohibited (000H)" is acquired as the attraction priority data in S107. Further, in the case where the symbol position is not internally won but does not result in an erroneous winning even if it is stopped, "stop possible (001H)" is acquired as the pull-in priority data in S107.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (not shown) corresponding to the search target reel (S108). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other.

The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of reel. In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to the symbol positions "0" to "19" of the corresponding reels is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to this attraction priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the stop table.

Further, the content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority.

By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. If there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

Next, the main CPU 93 adds "1" to the position data of the search symbol and subtracts "1" from the number of symbol checks (S109). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S110).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S110 that the number of symbol checks is not "0" (when the determination in S110 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S105 and repeats the processes after S105. On the other hand, in S110, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (when the determination in S110 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S111).

When it is determined in S111 that the main CPU 93 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S111 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S102 and repeats the processes after S102. On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S111 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority storage process and performs the process in S12 of the main flow (see FIG. 62). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S103 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 68) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority table selection data is set (S121).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S121 that the pull-in priority table selection data is set (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main CPU 93 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 29) and an operation stop button storage area. (See FIG. 28), the attraction priority table number corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data is set from the attraction priority table selection table (not shown) (S122). Then, after the processing of S122, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S104 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 68).

The attraction priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the attraction priority selection number and the pressing order of the stop button and the attraction priority table number in each combination. Further, the attraction priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the above-mentioned attraction priority table (not shown).

On the other hand, in S121, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority table selection data is not set (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets the attraction priority table corresponding to the attraction priority table number. Set (S123). Then, after the processing of S123, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S104 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 68).

[Design code storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the symbol code storage process performed in S105 in the flowchart (see FIG. 68) of the attraction priority storage process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets the effective line data (S131). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S132). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S133). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S106 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 68).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S141). In S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S141 and executes the pressing operation of the valid stop button. Wait until.

On the other hand, in S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 29) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 29). 28) is updated (S142). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts "1" from the value of the stop button non-operation counter (S143).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S144). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S145).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S146). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the number of slip pieces determination data based on the type of the stop button at the time of the first stop, various stop tables, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the priority pull-in control process (S147). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" or "1" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command generation / storage process (S148). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for a reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of slip pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determination data acquired in S146, and stores the determined stop schedule position in the main RAM 95 (S149). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the scheduled stop position.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S149 as the search symbol position (S150). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 70 (S151). After that, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) using the acquired symbol code (S152).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S153). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S154). When the main CPU 93 determines in S154 that the inactive counter is not "0" (when the determination in S154 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 68 (S155). ). After that, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S141 and repeats the processes after S141.

On the other hand, in S154, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S154 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 62). (See), move to S13.

As described above, the reel stop control process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing stop control of reel rotation (display of fluctuation of the symbol).

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the priority pull-in control process performed in S147 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 71) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets the pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S161). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the data of the stop start position (S162).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is in operation (S163). In S163, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not in operation (when the determination in S163 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S165 described later. On the other hand, in S163, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating (when the determination in S163 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search target reel is the left reel 3L (S164). ..

In S164, when the main CPU 93 determines that the search target reel is not the left reel 3L (when the determination in S164 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S165 described later. On the other hand, in S164, when the main CPU 93 determines that the search target reel is the left reel 3L (when the determination in S164 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S167 described later.

When the determination in S163 or S164 is NO (when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4 and the reel stop control is performed), the main CPU 93 sets the priority table corresponding to the number of sliding pieces determination data (S165).

The priority order table includes data for determining the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table and a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding pieces (when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4, "0" to "4". ”) Priority is specified in the order of application (hereinafter referred to as“ priority order ”). That is, in the priority order table, the order of the number of slip pieces to be preferentially applied is determined for each slip piece number determination data. In this embodiment, each numerical value is searched (checked) sequentially from the lower priority order "5" of the priority order table, and the numerical value corresponding to the priority order "1" is preferentially applied as the number of slip pieces. To do so. Then, in the process of S165, for example, when the number of slip pieces determination data is "4", the priority data defined in the address in the priority order table corresponding to the number of slide pieces determination data "4" is obtained. Set.

After the processing of S165, the main CPU 93 sets "5" in the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S166). By this process, the priority order is checked (searched) 5 times in the range of 0 to 4 frames. Then, after the processing of S166, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S169 described later.

Further, when the determination in S164 is YES (when the maximum number of sliding pieces is one and the reel stop control is performed), the main CPU 93 sets the priority table for the MB gaming state corresponding to the number of sliding pieces determination data. (S167). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the initial value of the priority order to "3" and sets the number of checks to "2" (S168). By this process, the priority order is checked (searched) twice in the range of 0 frames to 1 frame. Then, after the processing of S168, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S169 described later.

After the processing of S166 or S168, the main CPU 93 sets the number of sliding pieces determination data as the number of sliding pieces (S169).

Next, the main CPU 93 extracts the stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S170). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the pull-in priority data of the stop search position (S171).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the attraction priority data acquired in S171 is equal to or greater than the value of the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S172). In S172, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S171 is not equal to or higher than the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S172 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S174 described later. ..

On the other hand, in S172, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S171 is equal to or higher than the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S172 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the number of slip pieces. Update (S173).

After the processing of S173 or when the determination in S172 is NO, the main CPU 93 subtracts "1" from the value in the priority order and the number of checks (S174).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S175). When the main CPU 93 determines in S175 that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S170 and repeats the processes after S170.

On the other hand, in S175, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the finally updated number of sliding pieces (S176). Then, after the processing of S176, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control processing, and shifts the processing to S148 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 71).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, the bonus end check process performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is operating with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) (S181). In S181, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not operating (when the determination in S181 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and shifts the process to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 62). Move.

On the other hand, in S181, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is in operation (when the determination in S181 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the CB termination process (S182). In this process, the game status flag (not shown) corresponding to "CB" is turned off, the winning counter and the game counter are cleared, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter (S183).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (S184). In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 62) Move to S17.

On the other hand, in S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S184 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the MB end process (S185). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game status flag (2MB game status flag or 3MB game status flag) corresponding to the operating MB (“2MB” or “3MB”). To do. When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", the payout of medals exceeds 2 during the 2MB game state, or the payout of medals exceeds 30 during the 3MB game state. Means the case.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command generation and storage process (S186). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

Then, after the process of S186, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and shifts the process to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 62).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, the bonus operation check process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 62) will be described with reference to FIG. 74.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is in operation (S191). In S191, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not operating (when the determination in S191 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S193 described later.

On the other hand, in S191, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the CB operation process (S192). Then, after the processing of S192, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

Further, when the determination in S191 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is a prize (S193). In S193, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not a prize (when the determination in S193 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S197 described later.

On the other hand, in S193, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB has won a prize (when the determination in S193 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an MB operation process corresponding to the type of the winning MB (S194). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets "1" to the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27), and sets the value of the bonus end number counter to a predetermined value ("30" or "2"). Set to. Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 also performs the CB operation process of S192.

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S195). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command generation / storage process (S196). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 75. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started.

Then, after the processing of S196, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

Further, when the determination in S193 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay has won a prize (S197). In S197, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the re-game has not won a prize (when the determination in S197 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 62). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S197, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the re-game has won a prize (when the determination in S197 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests the automatic insertion of medals (S198). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S198, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 62).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S201). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S203). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Then, when the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main CPU 93 clears the game lock flag.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. It drives and controls three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the reel display window 4), and then corresponds to the corresponding value. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation of the reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S204, in addition to the above-mentioned normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing and stop processing, when a reel effect pattern is set at the time of acceleration processing, the reel effect pattern is supported. It also performs reel production (reel action) and lock control processing.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a command data transmission process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits various command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lamp 7-segment drive process (S206). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 24 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register reset process (S207). Then, after that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 128, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using the program will be described. Various tables required for various processes of the sub CPU 102 described below are stored in the ROM cartridge board 86, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas, and the like are provided in the sub RAM 103.

[Power-on processing of sub CPU]
First, the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. The request process in the power-on process shown in FIG. 76 is a process of requesting the OS to start various tasks necessary for the function of the pachi-slot machine 1.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs an initialization process (S211). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes processes such as initialization of the CPU and internal devices and initialization of peripheral ICs.

Next, the sub CPU 102 makes a request to start the lamp control task (see FIG. 77 described later) as a request to start the sub task (S212). Next, the sub CPU 102 makes a start request for the sound control task (see FIG. 78 described later) (S213). Then, the sub CPU 102 makes a request to start the mother task (see FIG. 79 described later) (S214).

[Ramp control task]
Next, the lamp control task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 76), when a lamp control task request is generated from the OS in response to a lamp control task start request by the sub CPU 102, the lamp control task is performed according to the procedure described below. Will be executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a timer interrupt initialization process (S221). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an initialization process of data related to lamp control (S222).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a timer interrupt wait process (S223). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an execution process of a sound control task (see FIG. 78 described later) (S224).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp data analysis process (S225). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp effect execution process (S226). Then, after the processing of S226, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S223 and repeats the processing after S223.

[Sound control task]
Next, the sound control task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 76), when a sound control task request is generated from the OS in response to a sound control task activation request by the sub CPU 102, the sound control task is performed according to the procedure described below. Will be executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound control-related data initialization process (S231). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the lamp control task (see FIG. 77) (S232).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs sound data analysis processing (S233). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound effect execution process (S234). Then, after the processing of S234, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S232 and repeats the processing after S232.

[Mother task]
Next, the mother task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 76), when a mother task request is generated from the OS in response to a mother task start request by the sub CPU 102, the mother task is executed according to the procedure described below. ..

First, the sub CPU 102 makes a start request for the main task (see FIG. 80 described later) (S241). Next, the sub CPU 102 makes a start request for the main board communication task (see FIG. 81 described later) (S242). Then, the sub CPU 102 makes a request to start the animation task (see FIG. 82 described later) (S243).

[Main task]
Next, the main task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the mother task of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 79), when the main task request is generated from the OS in response to the start request of the main task by the sub CPU 102, the main task is executed according to the procedure described below.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronizing Signal) interrupt initialization process (S251). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a VSYNC interrupt wait process (S252).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs drawing processing (S253). Then, after the processing of S253, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S252 and repeats the processing after S252.

[Main board communication task]
Next, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. In the mother task of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 79), when a main board communication task request is generated from the OS in response to a request for starting the main board communication task by the sub CPU 102, the main board communication is performed according to the procedure described below. The task is executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a communication message queue initialization process (S261). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a reception command check process (S262). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S263).

In S263, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has not received a command different from the previous one (when the determination in S263 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S262 and repeats the processes after S262. On the other hand, in S263, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has received a command different from the previous one (when the determination in S263 is YES), the sub CPU 102 generates various game information based on the received command, and the generated various types are generated. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 103 (S264).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a command analysis process (S265). The details of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later. Then, after the processing of S265, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S262 and repeats the processing after S262.

[Anime task]
Next, the animation task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. In the mother task of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 79), when an animation task request is generated from the OS in response to a request to start the animation task by the sub CPU 102, the animation task is executed according to the procedure described below.

First, the sub CPU 102 checks the change of the current game information generated by the main board communication task from the previous game information (S271). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the object control process (S272).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the animation task management process (S273). Then, after the processing of S273, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S271 and repeats the processing after S271.

[Command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the command analysis process performed in S265 in the flowchart of the main board communication task (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect content determination process (S281). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect content according to the received data. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp data determination process (S282). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines predetermined lamp data according to the effect content determined in S281. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs sound data determination processing (S283). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines predetermined sound data according to the effect content determined in S281.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers various determined data (S284). Then, after the processing of S284, the sub CPU 102 ends the command analysis processing, and shifts the processing to S262 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 81).

[Production content determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the effect content determination process performed in S281 in the flowchart of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83) will be described. The production data determined (registered) in the following processing is data that specifies animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered in each of the following processes, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and the effect such as displaying an image is executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the initialization command is received (S291).

In S291, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the initialization command is received (YES in S291), the sub CPU 102 performs the initialization command reception process (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of the initialization process based on the information included in the initialization command, such as whether or not the set value is changed and the set value. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the initialization command will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 described later. Then, after the processing of S292, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S291, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the initialization command is received (when the determination in S291 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the medal insertion command is received (S293).

In S293, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the medal insertion command is received (YES in S293), the sub CPU 102 performs the medal insertion command reception processing (S294). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect data at the time of medal insertion (at the time of betting) based on information included in the medal insertion command, for example, the presence / absence of medal insertion, the value of the insertion count counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like. (sign up. Then, after the processing of S294, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S293, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the medal insertion command is received (when the determination in S293 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the start command is received (S295).

In S295, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start command is received (YES in S295), the sub CPU 102 performs the start command reception process (S296). In this process, the sub CPU 102 includes information included in the start command, for example, the type of the game state flag, the value of the bonus end number counter, the type of the internal winning combination, the type of the flag related to the lock effect, the value of the effect timer, and the like. Based on, the production data at the start of the game (at the start) is determined (registered). The details of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later. Then, after the processing of S296, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S295, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the start command is received (when the determination in S295 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel rotation start command is received (S297).

In S297, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel rotation start command is received (YES in S297), the sub CPU 102 performs the reel rotation start command reception processing (S298). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the start of reel rotation based on the reel rotation start command. Then, after the processing of S298, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S297, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the reel rotation start command is received (when the determination in S297 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel stop command is received (S299).

In S299, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel stop command has been received (YES in S299), the sub CPU 102 performs the reel stop command reception processing (S300). In this process, the sub CPU 102 outputs the effect data at the time of reel stop based on the information included in the reel stop command, for example, the type of the stop reel (operation stop button), the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces, the effect number, and the like. Decide (register). Then, after the processing of S300, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S299, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the reel stop command is received (when the determination in S299 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the winning operation command is received (S301).

In S301, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning operation command has been received (when the determination in S301 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the winning operation command receiving processing (S302). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of the winning operation based on the information included in the winning operation command, for example, the type of the display combination, the flag related to the lock effect, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like. .. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 described later. Then, after the processing of S302, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S301, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the winning operation command is received (when the determination in S301 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus start command is received (S303).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S303 that the bonus start command has been received (YES in S303), the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus start command reception processing (S304). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the start of the bonus based on the bonus start command. Then, after the processing of S304, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S303, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus start command is received (when the determination in S303 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus end command is received (S305).

In S305, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the time when the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S305 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process when the bonus end command is received (S306). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the end of the bonus based on the bonus end command. Then, after the processing of S306, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S305, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S305 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the input state command is received (S307).

In S307, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the input state command is received (when the determination in S307 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and performs the process in S282 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83). Move to.

On the other hand, in S307, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the input state command is received (YES in S307), the sub CPU 102 performs the input state command reception process (S308). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of receiving the input state command based on, for example, the on-edge state / off-edge state information of each operation unit included in the input state command. Then, after the processing of S308, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

[Processing when initialization command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the process at the time of receiving the initialization command performed in S292 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 84) will be described.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 uses the sub-game state in the previous unit game (game) (hereinafter, referred to as "game state (previous)") and the sub-game state in the current unit game (hereinafter, "game state"). (Currently) ”) and the sub-game state in the next unit game (hereinafter referred to as“ game state (next time) ”) are managed.

Further, in the following, the case where the sub-game state is the normal state is referred to as "general middle", and the pseudo BB state when the pseudo BB game is started in the normal state is referred to as "general middle BB". The case where the sub-game state is the transition effect state is referred to as "race in progress", and the case where the sub-game state is the AT preparation state is referred to as "AT preparation". Further, the case where the sub-game state is the AT state is referred to as "AT in progress", and the pseudo BB state when the pseudo BB game is started in the AT state is referred to as "AT in BB". Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the sub-game state is the W chance state is referred to as "W chance in progress", and the case where the sub-game state is the additional challenge state is referred to as "additional challenge in progress".

First, the sub CPU 102 initializes the ball output related variable (S311). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets "general middle" in each of the gaming state (previous), gaming state (current), and gaming state (next time). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter to "180".

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a race information lottery process (S312). The details of the race information lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later. Then, after the process of S312, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the initialization command and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIG. 84).

[Lace information lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the race information lottery process performed in S312 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the initialization command (see FIG. 85) will be described. In this race information lottery process, various information related to the character's race effect performed in the transition effect game is determined by lottery.

First, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race runner MAP lottery table (see FIG. 33) and performs the race runner MAP lottery process (S321). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value (MAP number) of the lottery result of the race runner MAP lottery process to the "race runner MAP" (S322).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race information MAP data table (see FIG. 34), and based on the value of "race runner MAP" (race information MAP number), the winner lottery table corresponding to the race information MAP data. The type (target tables A to J) of (see FIG. 35) is determined (S323). In this process, based on the set race runner MAP (race information MAP) value, the "target table" (target table) corresponding to the race information MAP data up to 4 races ahead (1st to 5th races) Any of A to J) is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined "target table" for the first to fifth races (S324). Then, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process for the race winners (candidates) from the first race to the fifth race based on the "target table" from the first race to the fifth race set in S324 ( S325).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target person lottery process to the "race winner" (S326). By this processing, any of the race winners from the 1st race to the 5th race ("male A", "male B", "female A", "tengu", "kappa" and "male A / male B" Is set as the "race winner".

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP lottery table (see FIG. 36) and performs the race win rate MAP lottery process (S327). In this process, the sub CPU 102 defines the race win rate data of the "race winner" (race winner) set in S326 based on the current set value (any of 1 to 6) of the race win rate MAP. To determine. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result (race win rate MAP) of the race win rate MAP lottery process in the “race win rate map” (S328).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP data table (see FIG. 37) and acquires the race win rate data corresponding to the set “race win rate map” (S329). In this process, as shown in FIG. 37, only the race win rate data of the current set race (first race) may be determined, or the race win rate data of the second and subsequent races may also be determined. is there. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the race win rate data acquired in S329 (S330).

Then, after the processing of S330, the sub CPU 102 ends the race information lottery processing, and also ends the initialization command reception processing (see FIG. 85). As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the initialization command is received (when the information regarding the content of the race effect is not set in the initial state), the race victory target of the race effect executed in the transition effect game. The (candidate) person and its winning percentage are determined.

As described above, in the race information lottery process of the present embodiment, at the start of the game period of the normal game, information regarding the content of the race production is determined from the first race to the fifth race (four sets ahead of the current set). This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means for determining information regarding the effect content of each transition effect game performed after the end of the normal game from the current set to four sets ahead at the start of the game period of the normal game ( It also serves as a means of determining the transition effect).

[Processing when receiving start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the process at the time of receiving the start command performed in S296 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 84) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a variable setting process (S341). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs setting processing of various variables (various flags, counters, etc.) used for effect control according to the type of the sub game state. The details of the variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a ball ejection state update process (S342). In this process, the sub CPU 102 updates the game state (previous), game state (current), and game state (next time) information. The details of the ball ejection state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the Bns (bonus) state update process (S343). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs setting processing of various variables (various flags, counters, etc.) used for effect control according to the type of the pseudo BB state. The details of the Bns state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

The types of pseudo BB states managed in the present embodiment are "at the time of BB winning", "between BB flags", "waiting for BB operation", "in BB", "in JAC", "in ChaBB" and "in ChaJAC". There are 7 types. In addition, "between BB flags" indicates a state in which the pseudo BB game is being carried over, and "in JAC" indicates a state of "JACGAME guaranteed section". Further, "in ChaBB" indicates the state of the "JACIN challenge section" in the "general medium BB", and "during ChaJAC" indicates the state of the "JACIN challenge section" in the "AT during BB".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is at the start of the game of "general middle" (hereinafter, referred to as "general middle_game start") (S344).

In S344, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "general middle_game start time" (when S344 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 performs general middle_game start time processing (S345). .. The details of the general middle-game start processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105 described later. Then, after the processing of S345, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described later.

On the other hand, in S344, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "general middle_game start" (when S344 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 has a game in which the sub game state is "general middle BB". It is determined whether or not it is at the start (hereinafter, referred to as "general middle BB_game start") (S346).

In S346, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "at the start of the general middle BB_game" (when the determination in S346 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process at the start of the general middle BB_game (S347). .. The details of the general middle BB_game start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 described later. Then, after the processing of S347, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described later.

On the other hand, in S346, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "at the start of general BB_game" (when the determination in S346 is NO), the sub CPU 102 starts the game in which the sub game state is "during the race". It is determined whether or not it is time (hereinafter, referred to as "during the race_at the start of the game") (S348).

In S348, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "during the race_at the start of the game" (when the determination in S348 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process during the race_at the start of the game (S349). .. The details of the process at the start of the race will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later. Then, after the processing of S349, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described later.

On the other hand, in S348, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "during the race_at the start of the game" (when the determination in S348 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has a game in which the sub game state is "AT preparing". It is determined whether or not it is at the start (hereinafter, referred to as "AT preparation_at the start of the game") (S350).

In S350, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "AT preparation_game start" (when the determination in S350 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the AT preparation_game start process (when the AT preparation_game start time). S351). The details of the AT preparation _ game start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later. Then, after the processing of S351, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described later.

On the other hand, in S350, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "AT preparation_at the start of the game" (when the determination in S350 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has a game in which the sub game state is "AT". It is determined whether or not it is at the start (hereinafter, referred to as "during AT_at the start of the game") (S352).

In S352, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "during AT_at the start of the game" (when the determination in S352 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process at the time of the start of the AT_game (S353). .. The details of the process during AT_game start will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 described later. Then, after the processing of S353, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described later.

On the other hand, in S352, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "AT in _ game start" (when S352 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 has a game in which the sub game state is "AT in BB". It is determined whether or not it is at the start (hereinafter, referred to as "BB_game start during AT") (S354).

In S354, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "at the start of the BB_game during AT" (when the determination in S354 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process at the start of the BB_game during the AT (S355). .. The details of the BB_game start processing during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 115 described later. Then, after the processing of S355, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S356 described later.

On the other hand, in S354, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "at the start of BB_game during AT" (when the determination in S354 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S356 described later.

After the processing of S345, S347, S349, S351, S353 or S355, or when S354 is NO determination, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB precursor counter management processing (S356). In this process, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BB precursor counter indicating the number of remaining precursor games until the activation of the pseudo BB game.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a game state setting process (S357). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the game state (next time). The details of the game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 described later. Then, after the processing of S357, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 84).

Although not shown in FIG. 87, in a series of iterative processes of the above-mentioned sub-game state determination process and game start process during the start command reception process, the sub-game state is actually "W chance". Judgment processing of whether or not it is, and game start processing of "W chance", judgment processing of whether or not the sub-game state is "additional challenge", and game start processing of "additional challenge" are also performed. It is said.

[Variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the variable setting process performed in S341 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game state (next time) is "general" (S361).

In S361, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is "general middle" (when the determination in S361 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general middle_variable setting process (S362). The details of the general medium_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later. Then, after the processing of S362, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S367 described later.

On the other hand, in S361, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not "general" (when the determination in S361 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in the pseudo BB ("general"). It is determined whether or not it is "BB" or "BB during AT" (S363).

In S363, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is in the pseudo BB (when the determination in S363 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _ variable setting process in the BB (S364). The details of the _variable setting process in BB will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. Then, after the processing of S364, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S367 described later.

On the other hand, in S363, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not in the pseudo BB (when the determination in S363 is NO), is the sub CPU 102 in the gaming state (next time) "AT preparing"? Whether or not it is determined (S365).

In S365, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is "AT preparing" (when the determination in S365 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the AT preparing_variable setting process (S366). The details of the AT preparation_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later. Then, after the processing of S366, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S367 described later.

On the other hand, in S365, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not "AT preparation" (when the determination in S365 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S367 described later.

After processing S362, S364 or S366, or when S365 is a NO determination, is the sub CPU 102 at the end of the game when the game state (current) is "general" (hereinafter, referred to as "general end")? Whether or not it is determined (S367).

In S367, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "at the time of general termination" (when the determination in S367 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general termination_variable setting process (S368). The details of the general end_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. Then, after the processing of S368, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S373 described later.

On the other hand, in S367, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "at the general end" (when the determination in S367 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) "general middle BB" or It is determined whether or not it is at the end of the game of "BB during AT" (hereinafter, referred to as "at the end of BB") (S369).

In S369, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "at the end of BB" (when the determination in S369 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB end _ variable setting process (S370). The details of the BB end_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. Then, after the processing of S370, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S373 described later.

On the other hand, in S369, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "at the end of BB" (when the determination in S369 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in a game in which the gaming state (current) is "race". It is determined whether or not it is at the end (hereinafter referred to as "at the end of the race") (S371).

In S371, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "at the end of the race" (when the determination in S371 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _variable setting process at the end of the race (S372). The details of the _variable setting process at the end of the race will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. Then, after the processing of S372, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S373 described later.

On the other hand, in S371, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "at the end of the race" (when the determination in S371 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S373 described later.

After the processing of S368, S370 or S372, or when S371 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 initializes the "AT direct addition G (game) number" (S373). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets "0" to the number of additional AT games. Then, after the processing of S373, the sub CPU 102 ends the variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S342 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

Further, although not shown in FIG. 88, in the series of iterative processing of the above-mentioned game state (next time) determination process and variable setting process during the variable setting process, the game state (next time) is actually "race". , "At AT", "W chance", and "Additional challenge", and variable setting processing in these sub-game states are also performed. In the variable setting process when the game state (next time) is "W chance", "5" is set as the number of bell navigations.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 88, in the series of iterative processing of the above-mentioned game state (current) determination process and variable setting process during the variable setting process, the game state (current) is actually "W chance in progress". "" And "Additional challenge in progress" are determined, and variable setting processing in these sub-game states is also performed. In the variable setting process when the game state (current) is "W chance in progress", "5" is set as the number of bell navigations.

[General middle_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the general medium_variable setting process performed in S362 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“general middle”) (S381).

In S381, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S381 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle_variable setting process and performs the process. Move to S367 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, in S381, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S381 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) being "race". It is determined whether or not there is (S382).

In S382, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "race in progress" (when the determination in S382 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle_variable setting process and performs the process as the variable setting process. Move to S367 (see FIG. 88).

On the other hand, in S382, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is "race in progress" (when the determination in S382 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the next cycle (inn point) based on the "accommodation point". The number of shortened games (the number of next shortened games) in the non-AT state of the next set) is calculated (S383).

The "inn points" are the total number of shortened games generated by the cycle shortening lottery (may be multiple times) performed during the normal game of the current cycle (current set), and the pseudo BB game. It corresponds to the total number of games of the total number of shortened games of the surplus generated by the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery (may be multiple times) performed during the process.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the cycle counter to "180" (S384). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the number of next shortened games calculated in S383 from the value (180) of the cycle counter (S385). By this process, the subtraction result is set as the number of staying games in the normal state in the next set. Then, after the process of S385, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle_variable setting process, and shifts the process to S367 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88).

As described above, in S585 of the general medium_variable setting process of the present embodiment, the number of next shortened games (the number of shortened games of the surplus in the current set) is subtracted from the number of set games (180 games) of the normal game of the next set. The process is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (game number subtraction means) for subtracting the number of shortened games for the surplus from the number of set games of the normal game of the next set.

[In BB_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the BB-variable setting process performed in S364 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“general BB” or “AT BB”) (S391).

In S391, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S391 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _ variable setting process in BB and performs the process. Move to S367 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, in S391, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S391 is YES), the value of the BB precursor counter of the sub CPU 102 is "0". Whether or not it is determined (S392).

In S392, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not "0" (when the determination in S392 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _ variable setting process in the BB and performs the process as the variable setting process (when the process is determined to be NO). Move to S367 (see FIG. 88).

On the other hand, in S392, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" (when the determination in S392 is YES), the sub CPU 102 resets the value of the BB precursor counter ("-1"). Set) (S393). Then, after the process of S393, the sub CPU 102 ends the _variable setting process in BB, and shifts the process to S367 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88).

[AT preparation_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the AT preparing_variable setting process performed in S366 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“AT preparing”) (S401).

In S401, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S401 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_variable setting process and processes it. Is moved to S367 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, in S401, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S401 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the "race victory flag" and the "race runner map". , "Race win rate map" and "Race consecutive loss counter" (S402).

The "race victory flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the set "race winner" (race winner (candidate)) wins in the race production, and when the "race winner" wins the race, , "1" is set in the "race victory flag". Further, the "race consecutive loss counter" is a counter that manages the number of times that the set "race winner" is continuously defeated in the race production (the number of times that the AT is not won in succession). In the present embodiment, if the "race winner" loses in the race production 10 times in a row (at the ceiling), the AT win will be awarded.

Then, after the processing of S402, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparing_variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S367 of the variable setting processing (see FIG. 88).

[At general end_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the general termination_variable setting process performed in S368 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“at the time of general termination”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S411).

In S411, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S411 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general termination_variable setting process and processes it. To S373 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, in S411, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S411 is YES), the sub CPU 102 clears the "winning combination history" (S412). ..

The "winning combination history" is data representing the winning combination of 5 games' worth of internal winning roles (including "loss", "small role", and "replay"), and is used for the cycle shortening lottery and the direct addition lottery. Be done.

Then, after the processing of S412, the sub CPU 102 ends the general termination_variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S373 of the variable setting processing (see FIG. 88).

[At the end of BB_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the BB end _ variable setting process performed in S370 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“general middle BB” or “AT during BB”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S421).

In S421, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S421 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB end _ variable setting process and processes it. To S373 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, in S421, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is different from the game state (next time) (when the determination in S421 is YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the "BB game counter" ("-". 1 ”is set) (S422). The "BB game counter" is a counter that manages the number of remaining games in the JACIN challenge section (the section in which the push order 2-choice challenge game for acquiring JACGAME is performed).

Then, after the processing of S422, the sub CPU 102 ends the _variable setting processing at the end of BB, and shifts the processing to S373 of the variable setting processing (see FIG. 88).

[At the end of the race_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the race end_variable setting process performed in S372 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“during the race”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S431).

In S431, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S431 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the race end _ variable setting process and processes it. To S373 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, in S431, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S431 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the "number of race games" and the "race generation flag". , Clear the data of "race flag after AT" and "race win rate rewriting flag" (S432).

The "number of race games" is data for managing the number of elapsed games (1 to 10 games) of the race effect performed in the transition effect game, and the "race generation flag" indicates whether or not to generate the race effect. It is a flag to indicate. Further, the "post-AT race flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to generate a race effect after AT, and the "race win rate rewriting flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to rewrite the race win rate data. Although detailed description will be omitted, in the present embodiment, if the player wins the "rare role" in the game in the normal state, the race win rate will be increased by lottery. Then, when the lottery for increasing the race win rate is won, the "race win rate rewrite flag" is turned on.

Then, after the processing of S432, the sub CPU 102 ends the _variable setting process at the end of the race, and shifts the process to S373 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 88).

[Ball out status update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the ball ejection state update process performed in S342 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (previous) is different from the gaming state (current) (S451).

In S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous time) is not different from the gaming state (current) (when the determination in S451 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S453 described later. On the other hand, in S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous) is different from the gaming state (current) (when the determination in S451 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is in the gaming state (current) in the gaming state (previous). Is set (S452).

After the processing of S452 or when the determination in S451 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S453). In S453, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not different from the game state (next time) (when the determination in S453 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ball ejection state update process and starts the process. Move to S343 of command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S453, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S453 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is in the gaming state (current) in the gaming state (next time). Is set (S454). Then, after the processing of S454, the sub CPU 102 ends the ball ejection state update processing, and shifts the processing to S343 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

[Bns status setting process]
Next, the Bns state setting process performed in S343 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described with reference to FIG. 96.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "at the time of winning the BB" (S461).

In S461, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "at the time of BB winning" (when the determination in S461 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB winning _Bns state setting process (S462). The details of the BB winning _Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later. Then, after the processing of S462, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S461, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "at the time of BB winning" (when the determination in S461 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is "between BB flags". Is determined (S463).

In S463, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "between BB flags" (when the determination in S463 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _Bns state setting process between the BB flags (S464). The details of the BB flag-to-Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later. Then, after the processing of S464, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S463, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "between the BB flags" (when the determination in S463 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation". Is determined (S465).

In S465, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S465 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process (S466). The details of the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later. Then, after the processing of S466, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S465, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S465 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in BB". Determine (S467).

In S467, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in BB" (when the determination in S467 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB in _Bns state setting process (S468). The details of the _Bns state setting process in BB will be described later with reference to FIG. 100 described later. Then, after the processing of S468, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S467, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in BB" (when the determination in S467 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in JAC". (S469).

In S469, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in JAC" (when the determination in S469 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _Bns state setting process in JAC (S470). The details of the _Bns state setting process during JAC will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 described later. Then, after the processing of S470, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S469, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in JAC" (when the determination in S469 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in ChaBB". (S471).

In S471, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S471 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _Bns state setting process in ChaBB (S472). The details of the _Bns state setting process in ChaBB will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 described later. Then, after the processing of S472, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S471, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S471 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in ChaJAC". (S473).

In S473, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in ChaJAC" (when the determination in S473 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _Bns state setting process in ChaJAC (S474). The details of the _Bns state setting process during ChaJAC will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later. Then, after the processing of S474, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S344 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S473, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in ChaJAC" (when the determination in S473 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting process and processes the process when the start command is received. Move to S344 (see FIG. 87).

[At the time of BB winning_Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the BB winning _Bns state setting process performed in S462 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "between BB flags" (S481). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the _Bns state setting process between the BB flags (S482). The details of the BB flag-to-Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later. Then, after the processing of S482, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB winning _Bns state setting process, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96).

[Between BB flags_Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, S464 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) or BB flag interval_Bns performed in S482 in the flowchart of the BB winning _Bns state setting process (see FIG. 97). The state setting process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is "general BB" or "AT BB" (S491).

In S491, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "general BB" or "AT BB" (when S491 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S493 described later. On the other hand, in S491, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "general BB" or "AT BB" (when the determination in S491 is YES), the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to "B". Transition to "waiting for BB operation" (S492).

After the processing of S492, or when the determination of S491 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting processing (S493). The details of the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later. Then, after the processing of S493, the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process between the BB flags, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) or the BB winning _Bns state setting process (see FIG. 97).

[Waiting for BB operation_Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, BB operation waiting_Bns performed in S466 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) or S493 in the flowchart of the BB flag-to-Bns state setting process (see FIG. 98). The state setting process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "BB rush flag" is in the ON state (S501). The "BB rush flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the pseudo BB state shifts from "waiting for BB operation" to "in BB", and when the flag is on, the pseudo BB state is "BB". It shifts to "in BB" and the pseudo BB game is started.

In S501, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S501 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process and the Bns state setting process (FIG. 96). (See) or the _Bns state setting process between BB flags (see FIG. 98) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S501, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S501 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB entry flag in the OFF state (S502). Next, the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to “in BB” (S503).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value “2” in the “BB guaranteed JAC number” (S504). The "BB guaranteed JAC number" is the number of successful JACINs (the number of times JACGAME is executed) guaranteed in the JACGAME guaranteed section, and in the present embodiment, two JACGAMEs are guaranteed in the JACGAME guaranteed section.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value "10" to the value of the BB game counter (S505).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value "5" to the value of "JAC bell navigation number of times" (S506). In this embodiment, one JACGAME game period is managed by the number of small win navigations (bell navigations) related to the "pushing order bell" (CT bell) in which 10 medals are paid out, and 5 times. When the number of bell navigations is completed, one JACGAME game period ends. And, "JAC bell navigation number of times" represents the remaining number of bell navigations in JACGAME.

Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the "penalty flag" (S507). The "penalty flag" is a flag indicating whether or not a penalty has occurred. Then, after the processing of S507, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) or the BB flag-between _Bns state setting process (see FIG. 98).

[In BB_Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the _Bns state setting process in BB performed in S468 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "BARJAC inrush flag" is in the ON state (S511). The "BARJAC rush flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the transition of the pseudo BB state to "in JAC" is determined. The "BARJAC rush flag" is a valid line for a predetermined symbol combination (in this embodiment, "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" or "black cherry"-"black BAR"-"black BAR"). It is turned on when the stop is displayed above.

In S511, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S511 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during BB and the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S511, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush flag is on (when the determination in S511 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BARJAC inrush flag (S512). Next, the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to “in JAC” (S513).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of BB guaranteed JACs is larger than "0" (S514). In S514, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S514 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process in BB and the Bns state setting process. (See FIG. 96) also ends.

On the other hand, in S514, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is larger than "0" (when the determination in S514 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of BB guaranteed JACs (S515). Then, after the process of S515, the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process in BB, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96).

[JAC _Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the _Bns state setting process in JAC performed in S470 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of times of JAC bell navigation is "0" (S521). In S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is not "0" (when the determination in S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during JAC and the Bns state setting process (FIG. 96). See) also ends.

On the other hand, in S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is "0" (when the determination in S521 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB guaranteed JAC number is larger than "0". (S522).

In S522, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S522 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "in ChaBB" (S523). On the other hand, in S522, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB guaranteed JAC number is larger than "0" (when the determination in S522 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "in BB" (S524). ..

After the processing of S523 or S524, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value "5" to the value of the number of JAC bell navigations (S525). Then, after the processing of S525, the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during JAC, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96).

[ChaBB middle_Bns state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the _Bns state setting process in ChaBB performed in S472 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB game counter is less than "0" (S531).

In S531, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB game counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S531 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S533 described later. On the other hand, in S531, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB game counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S531 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "none" (S532). In this process, the data indicating the pseudo BB state is reset, and the sub-game state returns from the pseudo BB state to the normal state.

After the processing of S532, or when the determination in S531 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC entry flag is on (S533). In S533, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S533 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during ChaBB and the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S533, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush flag is on (when the determination in S533 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BARJAC inrush flag (S534). Next, the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to “in ChaJAC” (S535).

Then, after the processing of S535, the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process in ChaBB, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96).

[ChaJAC _Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the _Bns state setting process in ChaJAC performed in S474 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of JAC bell navigations is "0" (S541). In S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is not "0" (when the determination in S541 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during ChaJAC and the Bns state setting process (FIG. 96). See) also ends.

On the other hand, in S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is "0" (when the determination in S541 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is larger than "0". Determine (S542).

In S542, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S542 is NO), the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to "none" (S543). In this process, the data indicating the pseudo BB state is reset, and the sub-game state returns from the pseudo BB state to the AT state. On the other hand, in S542, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is larger than "0" (when the determination in S542 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "in ChaBB" (S544). ).

After the processing of S543 or S544, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value "5" to the value of the number of JAC bell navigations (S545). Then, after the processing of S545, the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during ChaJAC, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 96).

[General middle _ processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105, the general middle-game start processing performed in S345 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the start command reception processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is larger than "0" (S551).

In S551, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S551 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S553 described later. On the other hand, in S551, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is larger than "0" (when the determination in S551 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the cycle counter by "1" (S552).

After the processing of S552 or when the determination in S551 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race information MAP data is "0" (S553). In the present embodiment, as described above, five race information MAP data (“1” to “10”) up to four race destinations (first race to fifth race) are stored in advance at the start of the set of the normal game. Although it is set in the area, each time the race production is completed, the race information MAP data of the end race is deleted, and the race information MAP data of the next set and thereafter is stored in the storage area on the leading side. Shifted and stored. At this time, "0" is stored as race information MAP data in the last storage area that has become empty. Therefore, in the process of S553, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race information data of the reference storage area is empty.

In S553, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information MAP data is "0" (when the determination in S553 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the race information lottery process described with reference to FIG. 86 (S554). That is, if the information regarding the content of the race production of the current set (the type of the ally character who is the race victory target (candidate), the race win rate data of the ally character) is not set, the game of the normal game of the current set At the start of the period, information about the content of the race production will be decided by lottery. At this time, information on the content of the race production from the current set to 4 sets ahead (1st to 5th races) is determined. Then, after the processing of S554, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S569 described later.

On the other hand, in S553, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information MAP data is not "0" (when the determination in S553 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (previous) is "during the race". Is determined (S555). In S555, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous time) is not "during the race" (when the determination in S555 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S569 described later.

On the other hand, in S555, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous time) is "race in progress" (when the determination in S555 is YES), the sub CPU 102 satisfies the re-lottery condition of the race runner MAP. Whether or not it is determined (S556). In the present embodiment, the re-lottery condition of the race runner MAP is the case where the number of consecutive losses of the race (value of the consecutive loss counter of the race) is "5".

In S556, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the re-lottery condition of the race runner MAP is not satisfied (when the determination in S556 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S559 described later.

On the other hand, in S556, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the re-lottery condition of the race runner MAP is satisfied (when the determination in S556 is YES), the sub CPU 102 uses the race runner MAP lottery table (see FIG. 33). The race runner MAP lottery process is performed with reference to (S557). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value (race information MAP number) of the lottery result of the race runner MAP lottery process in the "race runner MAP" (S558).

After the processing of S558, or when the determination of S556 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race information MAP data table (see FIG. 34) and is based on the value of "race runner MAP" (race information MAP number). The type (target tables A to J) of the winner lottery table (see FIG. 35) corresponding to the race information MAP data is determined (S559). In this process, based on the set race runner MAP (race information MAP) value, the "target table" (target table) corresponding to the race information MAP data up to 4 races ahead (1st to 5th races) Any of A to J) is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined "target table" for the first to fifth races (S560).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process for the race winners (candidates) from the first race to the fifth race based on the "target table" from the first race to the fifth race set in S560 ( S561). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target person lottery process to the "race winner" (S562). By this processing, any of the race winners from the 1st race to the 5th race ("male A", "male B", "female A", "tengu", "kappa" and "male A / male B" Is set as the "race winner".

Next, the sub CPU 102 checks the race win rate data of the current set (S563).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "race information data" is "0" (S564). The "race information data" is the race win rate data, and in the process of S564, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race win rate data of the current set is set.

In S564, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information data is not "0" (when the determination in S564 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S569 described later.

On the other hand, in S564, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information data is "0" (when the determination in S564 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP lottery table (see FIG. 36) and races. Win rate MAP lottery processing is performed (S565). In this process, the sub CPU 102 defines the race win rate data of the "race winner" (race winner) set in S562 based on the current set value (any of 1 to 6) of the race win rate MAP. To determine.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result (race win rate MAP) of the race win rate MAP lottery process in the “race win rate map” (S566).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP data table (see FIG. 37) and acquires the race win rate data corresponding to the set “race win rate map” (S567). In this process, as shown in FIG. 37, only the race win rate data of the current set race (first race) may be determined, or the race win rate data of the second and subsequent races may also be determined. is there. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the race win rate data acquired in S567 (S568).

After the processing of S554 or S568, or when S555 or S564 determines NO, the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery processing (S569). The details of the pseudo BB lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs cycle shortening related processing (S570). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the cycle shortening lottery table (see FIGS. 46 and 47), and performs the cycle shortening lottery based on the data of the “winning combination history”.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is "10" or more and the "race generation flag" is in the off state (S571).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S571 that the determination condition of S571 is not satisfied (when the determination in S571 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the "accommodation point" as the lottery result of the cycle shortening lottery determined in S570. The number of corresponding shortened games is added (S572).

After the processing of S572, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race victory expectation degree lottery table (not shown) and performs the race victory expectation degree data up lottery (S573). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the race win expectation data up lottery in the race win rate data (S574). Then, after the processing of S574, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle _game start processing, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S571, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S571 is satisfied (when the determination in S571 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is the lottery result (shortening) of the cycle shortening lottery determined in S570 from the value of the cycle counter. The number of games) is subtracted, and the calculation result is set to the value of the cycle counter. Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the period counter after subtraction is less than "10" (S575).

In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is not less than "10" (when the determination in S575 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle _game start processing and performs the processing. Move to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is less than "10" (when the determination in S575 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a surplus corresponding to the calculation (subtraction) result. Add the number of shortened games to the "inn points" (S576). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter to "10" (S577). Then, after the processing of S577, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle _game start processing, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

As described above, in S570 of the general middle-game start processing of the present embodiment, a lottery for shortening the game period of the normal game is performed, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (normal game shortening means, first normal game shortening means) for determining the subtraction number of the current remaining unit game number of the normal game in the normal game. Further, in S576 of the general middle _ game start processing, when the value obtained by subtracting the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery of the normal game from the number of remaining unit games of the normal game is less than 10 games, the subtraction result Is stocked as the number of shortened games for the surplus. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for stocking the subtraction result as the number of shortened games for the surplus (surplus game number stocking means) when the subtraction result is less than 10 games.

[Pseudo BB lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the pseudo BB lottery process performed in S569 in the flowchart (see FIGS. 104 and 105) of the general middle-game start process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" or more (S581). In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" or more (when the determination in S581 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery process, and performs the process in general. The process moves to S570 of the start processing (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

On the other hand, in S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not "0" or more (when the determination in S581 is NO), is the sub CPU 102 in the gaming state (current) "general"? Whether or not it is determined (S582).

In S582, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "general" (when the determination in S582 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is a pseudo BB lottery (AT in progress, AT preparation in progress, race in progress) table. (See FIG. 44), a pseudo BB lottery process is performed based on the internal winning combination (S583). On the other hand, in S582, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "general middle" (when the determination in S582 is YES), the sub CPU 102 uses the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table (see FIG. 43). ), And the pseudo BB lottery process is performed based on the internal winning combination (S584).

After the processing of S583 or S584, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB lottery has been won (S585). In S585, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has not won the pseudo BB lottery (when the determination in S585 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery process and performs the process at the start of the general game (FIG. 104). And S570 of FIG. 105).

On the other hand, in S585, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB lottery has been won.
(When the determination in S585 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "at the time of winning BB" in the pseudo BB state (S586). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB precursor lottery table (see FIG. 45), and performs the pseudo BB precursor lottery process based on the internal winning combination (S587).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the pseudo BB precursor lottery (the number of precursor games of the pseudo BB game) in the BB precursor counter (S588). Then, after the processing of S588, the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S570 of the general middle-game start processing (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

As described above, the pseudo BB lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining the execution of the pseudo BB game (special game determining means).

[General BB_Game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the general middle BB_game start processing performed in S347 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the start command reception processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) (S591). In this process, the sub CPU 102 manages on / off of the "BB rush check flag" provided for checking the occurrence of an event called "command spill" due to a goto act (illegal act). The details of the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) (S592). In this process, the sub CPU 102 manages on / off of the "BARJAC rush check flag" provided for checking the occurrence of "command spill". The details of the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB counter management process (S593). The details of the BB counter management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (S594).

In S594, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S594 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to a winning percentage lottery table after winning the race (not shown) and draws a winning percentage up after winning the race. Process (S595). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the lottery process for increasing the winning percentage after winning the race in the race winning percentage data (S596). Then, after the processing of S596, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S604 described later.

On the other hand, in S594, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S594 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is "1" or more. (S597). In S597, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S597 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S604 described later.

On the other hand, in S597, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S597 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table (see FIG. 48). Then, based on the "winning combination history", a pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process is performed (S598). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the number of shortened games determined by the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process from the value of the current cycle counter, and sets this calculation result in the cycle counter (S599).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter after the arithmetic processing of S599 is "0" or less (S600). In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not "0" or less (when the determination in S600 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S604 described later.

On the other hand, in S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is "0" or less (when the determination in S600 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race occurrence flag (S601). By this process, after the pseudo BB game is completed, the race effect of the transition effect game is started.

Next, the number of shortened games (absolute value of the calculation result) corresponding to the value of the calculation result of S599 is added to the "accommodation point" (S602). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter to "0" (S603). Then, after the processing of S603, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S604 described later.

After the processing of S596 or S603, or when the determination of S597 or S600 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs the push order navigation lottery process of the small winning combination related to the "push order bell". (S604). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S605). Then, after the processing of S605, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle BB_game start processing, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

As described above, in S598 of the general middle BB_game start processing of the present embodiment, a shortening lottery for the game period of the normal game (pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery) is performed, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (second normal game shortening means) for determining the subtraction number of the current remaining unit game number of the normal game in the pseudo BB game.

[BB rush judgment processing (at the start of the game)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) performed in S591 in the flowchart (see FIG. 107) of the general middle BB_game start process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BB entry check flag (S611). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is "race in progress" (S612).

In S612, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "race in progress" (when the determination in S612 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation". Determine (S613). In S613, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S613 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) and generalizes the process. Move to S592 of the middle BB_game start processing (see FIG. 107).

On the other hand, in S613, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S613 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has an internal winning combination of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip". It is determined whether or not it is any of 8 ”(S614).

In S614, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not any of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" (when the determination in S614 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB entry determination process (game start). Time) is finished, and the process is transferred to S592 of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, in S614, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is any of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" (when the determination in S614 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the BB entry check flag. Is turned on (S615). Then, after the process of S615, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game), and shifts the process to S592 of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 107).

Here, returning to the process of S612 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S612 that the sub game state is "during the race" (when the determination in S612 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has the pseudo BB state ". It is determined whether or not it is "between the BB flags" (S616). In S616, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "between the BB flags" (when the determination in S616 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) and generalizes the process. Move to S592 of the middle BB_game start processing (see FIG. 107).

On the other hand, in S616, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "between the BB flags" (when the determination in S616 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has an internal winning combination of "normal lip 2" or "normal lip". It is determined whether or not it is "4" (S617).

In S617, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not "normal lip 2" or "normal lip 4" (when the determination in S617 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game). After finishing, the process is transferred to S592 of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, in S617, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is "normal lip 2" or "normal lip 4" (when the determination in S617 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB entry check flag. (S618). Then, after the process of S618, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game), and shifts the process to S592 of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 107).

[BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) performed in S592 in the flowchart of the process at the start of the general BB_game (see FIG. 107) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC inrush check flag is in the ON state (S621). In S621, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry check flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S621 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S625 described later.

On the other hand, in S621, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry check flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S621 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in BB". (S622). In S622, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in BB" (when the determination in S622 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S625 described later.

On the other hand, in S622, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in BB" (when the determination in S622 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC entry flag (S623). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB in _Bns state setting process described with reference to FIG. 100 (S624). Then, after the processing of S624, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S625 described later.

After the processing of S624, or when S621 or S622 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BARJAC entry check flag (S625).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “in BB” or “in ChaBB” (S626). In S626, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in BB" or "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S626 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game). , The process is transferred to S593 of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 107).

On the other hand, in S626, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in BB" or "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S626 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has an internal winning combination of "normal lip 1". -It is determined whether or not it is any of "normal lip 8" and "bell lip 1" to "bell lip 4" (S627).

In S627, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not one of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" and "bell lip 1" to "bell lip 4" (when S627 is a NO determination), the sub CPU 102 The CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game), and shifts the process to S593 of the general BB_game start process (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, in S627, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is one of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" and "bell lip 1" to "bell lip 4" (when S627 is a YES determination). ), The sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC inrush check flag (S628). Then, after the process of S628, the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game), and shifts the process to S593 of the general BB_game start process (see FIG. 107).

[BB counter management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the BB counter management process performed in S593 in the flowchart (see FIG. 107) of the general BB_game start process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “in ChaBB” (S631). In S631, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S631 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S634 described later.

On the other hand, in S631, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S631 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is larger than "0". Is determined (S632).

In S632, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S632 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S634 described later. On the other hand, in S632, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is larger than "0" (when the determination in S632 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BB game counter by "1" (S633). ). Then, after the processing of S633, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S634 described later.

After the processing of S633, or when S631 or S632 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in JAC" or "in ChaJAC" (S634).

In S634, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in JAC" or "in ChaJAC" (when the determination in S634 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process and is performing the process in general. BB_ Move to S594 of the game start processing (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, in S634, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in JAC" or "in ChaJAC" (when the determination in S634 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has an internal winning combination of "push order bell". (Any one of the winning numbers "9" to "12") is determined (S635).

In S635, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not the "push order bell" (when the determination in S635 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process and performs the process at the start of the general BB_game. The process moves to S594 (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, in S635, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is the "push order bell" (when the determination in S635 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of JAC bell navigations is greater than "0". Determine (S636).

In S636, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S636 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process and performs the process at the start of the general BB_game. The process moves to S594 (see FIG. 107).

On the other hand, in S636, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is larger than "0" (when the determination in S636 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of JAC bell navigations (S637). Then, after the processing of S637, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management processing, and shifts the processing to S594 of the general middle BB_game start processing (see FIG. 107).

[During the race_Processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the process during the race_game start time performed in S349 in the flowchart of the start command reception time processing (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 108 (S641). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the number of racing games (S642).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of racing games is "1" (S643). In S643, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of racing games is not "1" (when the determination in S643 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S650 described later.

On the other hand, in S643, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of race games is "1" (when the determination in S643 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is set with reference to the race result lottery table (see FIG. 40). The race result lottery process is performed based on the race win rate data (S644). In this process, the result of the race production (winning / non-winning) performed in the transition production game is determined. That is, in the present embodiment, the race result (winning / non-winning of the AT game) is determined by lottery in the first game (starting game) of the race production.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” in the bell payout number counter during the cycle (S645). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race has been won (whether or not the AT has been won) by lottery of the race results (S646).

In S646, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory has been won (when the determination in S646 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag (S647). Then, after the processing of S647, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S651 described later.

On the other hand, in S646, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory has not been won (when the determination in S646 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the race consecutive loss counter is "9" or more. (S648).

In S648, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the race consecutive loss counter is "9" or more (when the determination in S648 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag (S649). That is, when the number of consecutive losses in the race reaches "10" (ceiling), the race victory flag is turned on and the AT wins. Then, after the processing of S649, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S651 described later.

On the other hand, in S648, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the race consecutive loss counter is not "9" or more (when the determination in S648 is NO), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the race consecutive loss counter (S650). ). Then, after the processing of S650, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S651 described later.

After the processing of S647, S649 or S650, or when the determination of S643 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing described with reference to FIG. 106 (S651). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "at the time of winning the BB" (S652).

In S652, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "at the time of winning the BB" (when the determination in S652 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S654 described later. On the other hand, in S652, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "at the time of winning the BB" (when the determination in S652 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag (S653).

After the processing of S653, or when the determination in S652 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation" (S654). In S654, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S654 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S657 described later.

On the other hand, in S654, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S654 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is placed directly on the lottery table (FIG. 49). (See), and based on the "winning combination history", an additional lottery process for the number of AT games (directly added lottery process) is performed (S655). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of additional AT games) of the direct addition lottery process to the number of remaining AT games (S656).

After the processing of S656 or when the determination in S654 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs the push order navigation lottery process of the small winning combination related to the "push order bell" (S657). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S658). Then, after the processing of S658, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of starting the game during the race, and shifts the processing to S356 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 87).

As described above, in S644 of the process at the start of the race during the race of the present embodiment, the AT lottery is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (notifying game determining means) for determining whether or not to perform an AT game.

[Preparing AT_Processing at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the AT preparation _game start processing performed in S351 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing flowchart (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 106 (S661). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous time) (S662).

In S662, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous time) (when the determination in S662 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S675 described later. On the other hand, in S662, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (previous time) (when the determination in S662 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the "race winner" as "male A". It is determined whether or not it is (S663).

In S663, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is "male A" (when the determination in S663 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing at the time of male A victory_game start (S664). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games (the number of basic stay games in the AT state) of the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of victory of the "male A" described above. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag. Then, after the processing of S664, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

On the other hand, in S663, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not "male A" (when the determination in S663 is NO), the sub CPU 102 asks whether the "race winner" is "male B". Whether or not it is determined (S665).

In S665, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is "male B" (when the determination in S665 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing at the time of male B victory_game start (S666). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games in the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of victory of "male B" described above. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag. Then, after the processing of S666, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

On the other hand, in S665, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not "male B" (when the determination in S665 is NO), the sub CPU 102 asks whether the "race winner" is "female A". Whether or not it is determined (S667).

In S667, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is "woman A" (when the determination in S667 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of winning the woman A_starting the game (S668). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games in the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of victory of "Woman A" described above. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag. Then, after the processing of S668, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

On the other hand, in S667, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not "woman A" (when the determination in S667 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the "race winner" is a "kappa". (S669).

In S669, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is a "kappa" (when the determination in S669 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of winning the kappa_starting the game (S670). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games in the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "Kappa" described above. The details of the process of winning the kappa and starting the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later. Then, after the processing of S670, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

On the other hand, in S669, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not a "kappa" (when the determination in S669 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the "race winner" is a "tengu". Is determined (S671).

In S671, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is the "tengu" (when the determination in S671 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the tengu victory _ game start time processing (S672). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games in the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "tengu" described above. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag. Then, after the processing of S672, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

On the other hand, in S671, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not a "tengu" (when S671 is a NO determination), the sub CPU 102 has a "race winner" of "male A / male B". It is determined whether or not there is (S673). In S673, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not "male A / male B" (when the determination in S673 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S675 described later.

On the other hand, in S673, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is "male A / male B" (when the determination in S673 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the male A / male B wins_game. Start processing is performed (S674). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games in the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of victory of "male A / male B" described above. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT rush flag. Then, after the processing of S674, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S675 described later.

After processing S664, S666, S668, S670, S672 or S674, if S662 determines YES or S673 determines NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and "push order bell". The small winning combination navigation lottery process according to "S675" is performed. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S676). Then, after the processing of S676, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_game start processing, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

[Kappa victory _ processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the kappa victory time_game start time processing performed in S670 in the flowchart of the AT preparation_game start time processing (see FIG. 112) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the Kappa Sushi MAP data (see FIG. 54) of the current game is "0" (whether or not the Kappa Sushi MAP is not set) (S681).

In S681, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the Kappa sushi MAP data is not "0" (when the determination in S681 is NO), the sub CPU 102 moves the Kappa sushi MAP data from the next game onward toward the storage area on the leading side. Move one (S682). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores one dish of Kappa sushi MAP data (either "1" to "8" is stored or empty (" 0")) on the second to tenth dishes. Shift to the storage area of the Kappa sushi MAP data of the 9th dish and empty the storage area of the Kappa sushi MAP data of the 10th dish (store "0"). Then, after the processing of S682, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S687 described later.

On the other hand, in S681, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the Kappa sushi MAP data is "0" (when the determination in S681 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is the AT start game number lottery (Kappa victory) table (FIG. 50). -Refer to FIG. 53), and the Kappa sushi MAP lottery process is performed (S683). By this process, the number of "Kappa Sushi MAP" is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the Kawado sushi MAP data table (see FIG. 54), and based on the number of "Kado sushi MAP" determined in S683, the Kawado sushi MAP data from the first dish to the first to tenth dishes (see FIG. 54). Data of sushi material) is acquired (S684).

After the processing of S684, the sub CPU 102 sets the Kappa Sushi MAP data of the first to tenth dishes acquired in S684 (S685). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores the Kappa sushi MAP data of the first to tenth dishes defined in the Kappa sushi MAP in the corresponding storage area. Next, the sub CPU 685 sets the initial value "5" in the kappa end counter (S686).

After the processing of S682 or S686, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the Kappa Sushi MAP data of the sixth dish is empty (“0”) (S687). In S687, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the Kappa Sushi MAP data of the sixth dish is not empty (when the determination in S687 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S691 described later.

On the other hand, in S687, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the kappa sushi MAP data of the sixth dish is empty (when the determination in S687 is YES), the sub CPU 102 draws the number of AT start games (when the kappa wins). With reference to the table (see FIGS. 50 to 53), the kappa sushi MAP lottery process is performed based on the current kappa sushi MAP number (S688). By this process, the number of "Kappa Sushi MAP" set on the 6th plate is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the Kappa Sushi MAP data table (see FIG. 54) and acquires 10 dishes of Kappa Sushi MAP data based on the number of "Kappa Sushi MAP" determined in S688 (S689). .. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the Kappa sushi MAP data for 10 dishes defined in the Kappa sushi MAP acquired in S689 in the storage area for the sixth and subsequent dishes that is empty (S690).

After the processing of S690 or when the determination in S687 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the "group 1 combination" (S691). The "group 1 role" is an internal winning role corresponding to any of the winning numbers "9" to "14", and is "213 bell 1" to "213 bell 8", "231 bell 1" to "231". Inside any of "Bell 8", "312 Bell 1" to "312 Bell 8", "321 Bell 1" to "321 Bell 8", "1xx 3 Bell", "2xx 3 Bell" and "3xx 3 Bell" It is a winning role.

In S691, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not the "group 1 combination" (when the determination in S691 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the Kappa Sushi data conversion generation lottery table (see FIG. 56). Kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery processing is performed based on the internal winning combination (S692).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the Kappa Sushi data conversion generation lottery has been won (S693). In S693, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery has not been won (when the determination in S693 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of Kappa victory_game start and prepares the process for AT. Move to S675 of the middle_game start processing (see FIG. 112).

On the other hand, in S693, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lottery for generating Kawado sushi data conversion has been won (when the determination in S693 is YES), the sub CPU 102 uses the Kawado sushi data conversion lottery table (see FIGS. 57 to 61). With reference to this, conversion lottery processing of sushi material (Kado sushi MAP data) for 5 dishes (2nd to 6th dishes) after the next game is performed (S694).

Next, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) of the second to sixth dishes based on the lottery result of the Kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery process of S694 (S695). Then, after the processing of S695, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of winning the kappa_game, and shifts the processing to S675 of the processing at the time of AT preparation_game start (see FIG. 112).

Here, returning to the process of S691 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S691 that the internal winning combination is the "group 1 combination" (when the determination in S691 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is the number of kappa games. The number of acquired AT games is determined by lottery based on the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) with reference to the acquired lottery table (see FIG. 55) (S696). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of acquired AT games to the current number of acquired AT games (S697).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sushi material at the time of acquiring the number of AT games is either "squid", "salmon", or "tuna" (Kappa Sushi MAP data is "1", "4", and "6". Whether or not it is any of the above) (S698). In S698, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi material is not any of "squid", "salmon", and "tuna" (when the determination in S698 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S700 described later.

On the other hand, in S698, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi material is any of "squid", "salmon" and "tuna" (when the determination in S698 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is the value of the kappa end counter. Is subtracted by "1" (S699).

After the processing of S699 or when the determination in S698 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the kappa end counter is less than "0" (S700).

In S700, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the kappa end counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S700 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the number of AT games after the addition calculation of S697 to "the number of AT start games". "(S701). Then, after the processing of S701, the sub CPU 701 ends the processing at the time of winning the kappa_game, and shifts the processing to S675 of the processing at the time of AT preparation_game start (see FIG. 112).

On the other hand, in S700, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the kappa end counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S700 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag (S702). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "20 times" in the "BET return chance" (S703).

By the processing of S703, as the revival lottery of the game for determining the number of AT start games, which is performed at the end of the processing at the time of winning the kappa _ at the start of the game, the lottery by pressing the BET button 20 times (recovery of repeated hits) becomes possible. If the revival lottery by pressing the BET button 20 times is won, the kappa victory time_game start time processing (AT start game number acquisition processing) is performed again.

Then, after the processing of S703, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of winning the kappa_game, and shifts the processing to S675 of the processing at the time of AT preparation_game start (see FIG. 112).

Although not shown in FIG. 113, when the sushi material is "Kappa roll" (when the Kappa sushi MAP data is "3") in the lottery processing of the number of acquired AT games in S696, "LIFE up" is performed. Wins. In this case, the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the kappa end counter instead of a series of processes from the AT game number addition process (S697) to the kappa end counter subtraction process (S699). Will be done.

As described above, in S684 of the Kappa victory time_game start time processing of the present embodiment, 10 dishes (10 games) of sushi material (Kappa sushi MA data) sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are determined. , This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (game information determining means) for determining game information for 10 games sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the Kappa Sushi production. Further, in S695 of the processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start, if the internal winning role is other than "Group role 1" (for example, "missing") and the Kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery is won, the second to sixth dishes The Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) of the eyes is rewritten, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (game information changing means) for changing the Kappa Sushi MAP data (sushi material) for the second and subsequent dishes when the internal winning combination is lost. In addition, in S697 of the processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start, when the internal winning combination is "group combination 1" (specified internal winning combination), the number of acquired AT games is added to the current number of acquired AT games. , This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for adding the number of acquired AT games to the current number of acquired AT games (unit game number adding means).

In addition, in S697 to S699 of the processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start, when the internal winning combination is "Group role 1", the value of the Kappa end counter is updated according to the sushi material (Kappa sushi MA data) ("" 1 "subtraction or" 1 "addition) is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for updating the value of the kappa end counter (end information updating means). Further, in S701 of the kappa victory_game start processing, if the value of the kappa end counter is less than "0" (when the AT start game number determination game at the kappa victory ends), it is acquired at that time. The total number of AT games is set as the number of AT start games, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means for setting the total number of AT games acquired by the end of the AT start game number determination game at the time of Kappa victory as the AT start game number (basic unit game number). It also serves as a decision-making means). Further, in S703 of the process at the time of Kappa victory_game start, a revival lottery of the AT start game number determination game at the time of Kappa victory is performed at the end of the AT start game number determination game, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. To. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means for performing a revival lottery of the AT start game number determination game at the time of Kappa victory at the end of the game period of the AT start game number determination game at the time of Kappa victory (return lottery means). Also serves as.

[During AT_Processing at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the process at the time of AT_game start performed in S353 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (S711).

In S711, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S711 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S713 described later. On the other hand, in S711, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (when the determination in S711 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of remaining AT games (S712).

After the processing of S712 or when S711 is NO determination, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) and the gaming state (previous) is "AT preparing". (S713). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S713 that the determination condition of S713 is not satisfied (when the determination in S713 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S718 described later.

On the other hand, in S713, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S713 is satisfied (when the determination in S713 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the winner lottery table (see FIG. 35) and the race victory target (see FIG. 35). The lottery process of the candidate) person is performed (S714). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target person lottery process to the “race winner” (S715).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the post-AT race win expectation data selection lottery table (see FIG. 42), and performs a race win rate lottery process (post-AT race win rate lottery process) performed in the post-AT transition production game (see FIG. 42). S716). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the post-AT race win rate lottery process in S716 in the race win rate data (S717).

After the processing of S717 or when the determination in S713 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing described with reference to FIG. 106 (S718). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the direct addition lottery table (see FIG. 49), and performs an additional lottery process for the number of AT games (directly added lottery process) (S719). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of additional AT games) of the direct addition lottery process to the number of remaining AT games (S720).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small winning combination related to the “push order bell” (S721). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S722).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the main small winning combination (“pushing order bell (CT bell)”) and the pushing order navigation lottery process is won (S723).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S723 that the determination condition of S723 is not satisfied (when the determination in S723 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S725 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S723 that the determination condition of S723 is satisfied (when the determination in S723 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the AT game period (sum of the differences). ) Is updated (S724). In this update process, the sub CPU 102 net increases the difference number of medals (payout number-multiplied number) obtained at the time of winning the main small role ("pushing order bell (CT bell)") won in the current game. Add to the number of sheets.

After the processing of S724 or when the determination in S723 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (S725). By the process of S725, it is determined whether or not the AT game is continued in the next game. Therefore, the process of S725 shows the first example of the notification game ending means according to the present invention.

In S725, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (when the determination in S725 is YES), that is, when the AT game is continued in the next game, the sub CPU 102 is in the game state (when the AT game is continued). Set the game state (current) to (next time) (S726). Then, after the processing of S726, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-game start processing of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

In S725, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S725 is NO), that is, when the AT game ends in the current game, the sub CPU 102 uses the AT game. It is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the period (total of the difference numbers) is equal to or greater than the specified number (S727).

The specified number of sheets is set in advance according to the total number of AT games (number of games) in the AT game period. In the present embodiment, for example, when the total number of AT games (number of games) in the AT game period is 50 games, the specified number of games is set to 150. In addition, a plurality of specified number of sheets according to this embodiment may be provided. Further, the specified number of sheets may be determined for each set of AT games, or may be determined at the start of AT games. Further, the specified number of cards may be determined according to the number of initial AT games.

In S727, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the AT game period (the total number of medals) is not equal to or greater than the specified number (when the determination in S727 is NO), the sub CPU 102 will be described later. The process of S729 is performed.

On the other hand, in S727, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the AT game period (the total number of medals) is equal to or greater than the specified number (when the determination in S727 is YES), the sub CPU 102 , Rewrite the race win rate to 100% (S728). That is, the operation of the next AT is determined.

After the processing of S728 or when the determination in S727 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets "during racing" in the gaming state (next time) (S729). Then, after the processing of S729, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of AT_game start, and shifts the processing to S356 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 87).

As described above, in the AT-game start processing of the present embodiment, an additional lottery is performed for the number of AT games, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (notifying game adding means, first notifying game adding means) for determining the addition number (additional number) of the unit game number of the AT game in the AT game.

[BB_Game start processing during AT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the BB_game start processing during AT performed in S355 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the start command reception processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 108 (S731). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 109 (S732). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB counter management process described with reference to FIG. 110 (S733).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the direct addition lottery table (see FIG. 49), and performs an additional lottery process for the number of AT games (directly added lottery process) (S734). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of additional AT games) of the direct addition lottery process to the number of remaining AT games (S735).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small winning combination related to the “push order bell” (S736). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S737). Then, after the processing of S737, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game start processing during AT, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

As described above, in the process at the start of the BB_game during AT of the present embodiment, the number of AT games is added to the lottery, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining the addition number of the unit game number of the AT game (second notification game addition means) in the pseudo BB game.

[Game status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the game state setting process performed in S357 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is "general" (S741).

In S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "general middle" (when the determination in S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general middle_game state setting process (S742). The details of the general middle _game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 117 described later. Then, after the processing of S742, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting processing, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "general middle" (when the determination in S741 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) "general middle BB". Whether or not it is determined (S743).

In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "general middle BB" (when the determination in S743 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general middle BB_game state setting process (S744). The details of the general BB_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later. Then, after the process of S744, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "general middle BB" (when the determination in S743 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in the gaming state (current) "racing". Whether or not it is determined (S745).

In S745, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "race in progress" (when the determination in S745 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the during-race_game state setting process (S746). The details of the during-race_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later. Then, after the process of S746, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S745, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "race in progress" (when the determination in S745 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) "AT preparing". Whether or not it is determined (S747).

In S747, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is "AT preparing" (when the determination in S747 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the AT preparation_game state setting process (S748). .. The details of the AT preparation_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 described later. Then, after the processing of S748, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting processing and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S747, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "AT preparing" (when the determination in S747 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) "AT in progress BB". It is determined whether or not there is (S749).

In S749, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "AT in BB" (when the determination in S749 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the AT BB_game state setting process (S750). The details of the BB_game state setting process during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 described later. Then, after the processing of S750, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting processing and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S749, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "AT in BB" (when the determination in S749 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting process and processes when the start command is received. (See FIG. 87) also ends.

Although not shown in FIG. 116, in a series of iterative processes of the above-mentioned sub-game state determination process and game state setting process during the game state setting process, the sub-game state is actually "W chance". Judgment processing of whether or not there is, game state setting process of "W chance in progress", determination process of whether or not sub-game state is "AT in progress", and game state setting process of "AT in progress" are also performed. ..

[General middle_game status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the general medium_game state setting process performed in S742 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is "0" (S761).

In S761, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not "0" (when the determination in S761 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S763 described later. On the other hand, in S761, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is "0" (when the determination in S761 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "during the race" in the gaming state (next time) ( S762).

After the processing of S762 or when the determination in S761 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" (S763). In S763, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not "0" (when the determination in S763 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle _game state setting process and the game state setting process. (See FIG. 116) also ends.

On the other hand, in S763, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" (when the determination in S763 is YES), is the sub CPU 102 in the gaming state (next time) "in the race"? Whether or not it is determined (S764).

In S764, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not "during the race" (when the determination in S764 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S766 described later. On the other hand, in S764, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is "race in progress" (when the determination in S764 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race occurrence flag (S765).

After the processing of S765 or when the determination in S764 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (S766). In S766, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S766 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S768 described later. On the other hand, in S766, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S766 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "0" in the cycle counter (S767).

After the processing of S767 or when the determination in S766 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets "general middle BB" in the gaming state (next time) (S768). Then, after the processing of S768, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle _game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

[General BB_Game status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the general medium BB_game state setting process performed in S744 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is "0" (S771). In S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not "0" (when the determination in S771 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_game state setting process and the game state setting process. (See FIG. 116) also ends.

On the other hand, in S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is "0" (when the determination in S771 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a pseudo BB state of "ChaJAC" and JAC. It is determined whether or not the number of times of bell navigation is larger than "0" (S772). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S772 that the determination condition of S772 is satisfied (when the determination in S772 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_game state setting process and the game state setting process (see FIG. 116). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S772, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S772 is not satisfied (NO determination in S772), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is on (S773). ..

In S773, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S773 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets "general middle" in the game state (next time) (S774). Then, after the processing of S774, the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

On the other hand, in S773, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S773 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "during the race" in the gaming state (next time) (S775). .. Then, after the process of S775, the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

[During the race_Game status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the during-race_game state setting process performed in S746 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of racing games is the 10th game (S781). In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of race games is not the 10th game (when the determination in S781 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the race-in-game state setting process and the game state setting process (FIG. (See 116) also ends.

On the other hand, in S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of race games is the 10th game (when the determination in S781 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race victory flag is on (the race victory flag is ON). S782).

In S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S782 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets "general middle" in the game state (next time) (S783). Then, after the processing of S783, the sub CPU 102 ends the during-race_game state setting process, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

On the other hand, in S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S782 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is "0". (S784).

In S784, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not "0" (when the determination in S784 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT preparation" in the gaming state (next time) (S785). ). Then, after the processing of S785, the sub CPU 102 ends the _game state setting process during the race, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

On the other hand, in S784, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" (when the determination in S784 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT in BB" in the gaming state (next time). (S786). Then, after the processing of S786, the sub CPU 102 ends the during-race_game state setting process, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

[AT preparation_game status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the AT preparing_game state setting process performed in S748 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT entry flag is in the ON state (S791). In S791, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT rush flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S791 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_game state setting process and the game state setting process (FIG. (See 116) also ends.

On the other hand, in S791, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT entry flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S791 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT in progress" in the gaming state (next time) (S792). .. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" or more (S793).

In S793, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not "0" or more (when the determination in S793 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S796 described later.

On the other hand, in S793, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" or more (when the determination in S793 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the BB precursor counter to "0". (S794). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “AT in BB” to the gaming state (next time) (S795).

After the processing of S795 or when the determination in S793 is NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the "game number lottery end flag" (S796). The "game number lottery end flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to end the AT start game number determination game. Then, after the processing of S796, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_game state setting process, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

[BB_game status setting process during AT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the BB_game state setting process during AT performed in S750 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 116) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is "0" (S801). In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not "0" (when the determination in S801 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT and the game state setting process. (See FIG. 116) also ends.

On the other hand, in S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is "0" (when the determination in S801 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a pseudo BB state of "ChaJAC" and JAC. It is determined whether or not the number of times of bell navigation is larger than "0" (S802). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S802 that the determination condition of S802 is satisfied (when the determination in S802 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT and the game state setting process (see FIG. 116). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S802, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S802 is not satisfied (NO in S802), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race victory flag is on (S803). ..

In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S803 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT preparing" in the game state (next time) (S804). Then, after the processing of S804, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

On the other hand, in S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S803 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "additional challenge flag" is in the ON state (when the race victory flag is determined to be NO). S805). The "additional challenge flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the game in the additional challenge state is executed, and although not shown, it is set in the AT preparation_game state setting process.

In S805, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the addition challenge flag is on (when the determination in S805 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "additional challenge in progress" to the gaming state (next time) (S806). Then, after the processing of S806, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

On the other hand, in S805, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional challenge flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S805 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT in progress" in the gaming state (next time) (S807). Then, after the processing of S807, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 116).

[Processing when receiving a winning operation command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command performed in S302 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 84) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is at the time of winning the "general middle BB" (hereinafter, referred to as "general middle BB_winning time") (S811).

In S811, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is "general middle BB_winning time" (when S811 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 performs the general middle BB_winning time processing (S812). The details of the general BB_ prize-winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 described later. Then, after the processing of S812, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 84).

On the other hand, in S811, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "general medium BB_winning time" (when S811 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 is when the sub game state is "general small and medium size winning combination". (Hereinafter referred to as "general small and medium-sized role_at the time of winning"), it is determined whether or not it is (S813).

In S813, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is "general small / medium-sized combination_winning" (when the determination in S813 is YES), the sub-CPU 102 performs the general small-to-medium-sized winning combination_winning process (S814). .. The details of the general small and medium-sized combination_winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later. Then, after the processing of S814, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 84).

On the other hand, in S813, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "general small and medium-sized combination_at the time of winning" (when the determination of S813 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is at the time of winning the sub game state is "during the race". (Hereinafter referred to as "during the race_at the time of winning"), it is determined (S815).

In S815, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is "during the race_at the time of winning" (when the determination in S815 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing during the race_at the time of winning (S816). The details of the process during the race_winning will be described later with reference to FIG. 127 described later. Then, after the processing of S816, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 84).

On the other hand, in S815, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "during race_at the time of winning" (when S815 is determined to be NO), the sub CPU 102 is at the time of winning when the sub game state is "during AT BB". (Hereinafter referred to as "at the time of BB_winning during AT"), it is determined (S817). In S817, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "at the time of BB_winning during AT" (when the determination in S817 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command and determines the production content. The process (see FIG. 84) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S817, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "at BB_winning during AT" (when the determination in S817 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs BB_winning during AT processing (S818). .. The details of the BB_winning process during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 128 described later. Then, after the processing of S818, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 84).

[General middle BB_ processing at the time of winning]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the general middle BB_ winning process performed in S812 in the flowchart (see FIG. 122) of the winning operation command receiving process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) (S821). The details of the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) (S822). The details of the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later. Then, after the processing of S822, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle BB_ prize-winning process, and also ends the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 122).

[BB rush judgment processing (at the time of winning)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning) performed in S821 in the flowchart (see FIG. 123) of the general BB_ winning process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB inrush check flag is in the ON state (S831). In S831, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB rush check flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S831 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush judgment process (at the time of winning), and the process is performed in the general BB_ prize. Move to S822 of time processing (see FIG. 123).

On the other hand, in S831, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S831 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB entry check flag in the OFF state (S832).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop button pressing order by the player is in a predetermined order (whether or not the pressing order is correct) (S833). In addition, when the internal winning combination is "normal lip 1" or "normal lip 3", if the pressing order of the stop button is "right, left, middle", the pressing order is correct. When the internal winning combination is "normal lip 2" or "normal lip 4", if the stop button pressing order is "right, middle, left", the pressing order is correct. When the internal winning combination is "normal lip 5" or "normal lip 7", if the stop button pressing order is "middle left and right", the pressing order is correct. Further, when the internal winning combination is "normal lip 6" or "normal lip 8", if the pressing order of the stop button is "middle right left", the pressing order is correct.

In S833, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stop button pressing order by the player is not a predetermined order (when the determination in S833 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) and processes the process. Is moved to S822 of the general middle BB_ prize-winning process (see FIG. 123).

On the other hand, in S833, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stop button pressing order by the player is in a predetermined order (when the determination in S833 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB entry flag (S834). ). Then, after the processing of S834, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination processing (at the time of winning), and shifts the processing to S822 of the general middle BB_winning processing (see FIG. 123).

[BBJAC transition judgment process (at the time of winning)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) performed in S822 in the flowchart of the general BB_winning process (see FIG. 123) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC inrush check flag is in the ON state (S841). In S841, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry check flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S841 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S848 described later.

On the other hand, in S841, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush check flag is on (when the determination in S841 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BARJAC inrush check flag (S842). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “in BB” (S843).

In S843, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “in BB” (when the determination in S843 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S847 described later. On the other hand, in S843, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in BB" (when the determination in S843 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in ChaBB". (S844).

In S844, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S844 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S848 described later. On the other hand, in S844, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S844 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a display combination (winning combination) of "BAR lip". Whether or not it is determined (S845). The winning combination "BAR Lip" corresponds to "Bell Lip 3" or "Bell Lip 4".

In S845, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display combination (winning combination) is the "BAR lip" (when the determination in S845 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S847 described later. On the other hand, in S845, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display combination (winning combination) is not the "BAR lip" (when the determination in S845 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in the gaming state (currently BB during AT). It is determined whether or not there is (S846).

In S846, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "AT in BB" (when the determination in S846 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S847 described later. On the other hand, in S846, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "AT in BB" (when the determination in S846 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S848 described later.

If S843, S845 or S846 is determined to be YES, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC entry flag (S847).

After the processing of S847, or when S841, S844 or S846 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S848). In S848, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S848 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning). , Processing is completed during general BB_ prize-winning processing (see FIG. 123).

On the other hand, in S848, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S848 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC entry flag is on. Is determined (S849). In S849, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S849 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) and performs the process in general BB_winning. The time processing (see FIG. 123) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S849, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S849 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the game state (current) to the game state (next time) (S850). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the BB game counter to "0" (S851). Then, after the process of S851, the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning), and also ends the process during the general BB_winning process (see FIG. 123).

[General small and medium-sized roles_processing at the time of winning]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the general small / medium-sized combination_winning process performed in S814 in the flowchart of the winning operation command reception processing (see FIG. 122) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the small winning combination related to the bell is a prize (S861). In the present embodiment, the "small role related to the bell" is "213 bell" ("213 bell 1" to "213 bell 8"), "231 bell" ("231 bell 1" to "231 bell 8"). , "312 bells" ("312 bells 1" to "312 bells 8"), "321 bells" ("321 bells 1" to "321 bells 8"), "left 3 bells" ("1xx 3 bells") , And "middle right 3 bells" ("2xx 3 bells", "3xx 3 bells").

In S861, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the small winning combination related to the bell is not won (when the determination in S861 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general small / medium-sized combination_winning process and receives the winning operation command. (See FIG. 122) also ends.

On the other hand, in S861, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the small winning combination related to the bell is a prize (when the determination in S861 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the number of payouts to the bell payout counter during the cycle (S862). .. After the process of S862, the sub CPU 102 ends the general small / medium-sized combination_winning process, and also ends the winning operation command receiving process (see FIG. 122).

[During the race_Processing at the time of winning]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the during-race_winning process performed in S816 in the flowchart of the winning operation command receiving process (see FIG. 122) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB inrush check flag is in the ON state (S871). In S871, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S871 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the race_winning time and processes when the winning operation command is received (when the winning operation command is received). (See FIG. 122) also ends.

On the other hand, in S871, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S871 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB entry check flag in the OFF state (S872).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop button pressing order by the player is in a predetermined order (whether or not the pressing order is correct) (S873).

In S873, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the order of pressing the stop buttons by the player is not a predetermined order (when the determination in S873 is NO), the sub CPU 102 turns on the penalty flag (S874). Then, after the processing of S874, the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the race_at the time of winning, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, in S873, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stop button pressing order by the player is a predetermined order (when the determination in S873 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB entry flag (S875). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "AT in BB" to the gaming state (next time) (S876). Then, after the processing of S876, the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the race_at the time of winning, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command (see FIG. 122).

[BB during AT_Processing at the time of winning]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the BB_winning process during AT performed in S818 in the flowchart (see FIG. 122) of the winning operation command receiving process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning) described with reference to FIG. 124 (S881). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) described with reference to FIG. 125 (S882). Then, after the processing of S882, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_winning time processing during AT, and also ends the winning operation command reception time processing (see FIG. 122).

<Various effects of the present invention>
The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the following various effects.

[Various effects obtained by playing games between 2MB flags]
In the present embodiment, as described above, in the RT1 (high RT) game state in which the winning and winning bonus "2MB" is carried over only in the two-card game, that is, in the state between the 2MB flags, a predetermined number of games (190). Various games such as a non-AT state game (normal game and transition production game) having one cycle of the game) and a game in the AT state of a specific number of games are performed. Then, in the game in the state between the 2MB flags, a suggestion of three cards is given, and as long as the player plays the game of three cards according to the suggestion, the game can be played without winning the bonus "2MB". As long as the player plays a three-card game in the state between the 2MB flags, the lottery table for which the establishment and winning of the bonus "2MB" are not specified is referred to, so any stop operation is performed for the bonus "2MB". It is structured so that it does not win a prize.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a "loss" or a specific internal winning combination (small combination or replay combination) is internally won once or continuously in a normal game, the game period in a non-AT state (normally). A lottery (cycle shortening lottery) is performed to shorten the number of games during the game period. Then, if the cycle shortening lottery is won, the game period in the non-AT state of the current set can be shortened, and the period until the transition to the AT state can be shortened. Further, in the present embodiment, when a "loss" or a predetermined internal winning combination (replay combination) is internally won once or continuously in an AT game, an additional lottery for the number of AT games (directly added lottery) is performed. If the game is played and the additional lottery is won, the number of remaining AT games will increase.

That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in the high RT gaming state during which the bonus is carried over, even if the internal winning combination becomes "missing", the advantageous game can be continued without winning the bonus. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the content of the privilege given at the time of winning the "loss" is different depending on the type of the sub-game state ("normal state" or "AT state") in the high RT game state during the bonus carry-over. be able to.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to give a game value to the "loss" that occurs in the game in the high RT game state during the bonus carry-over, and the range of the game can be expanded. In addition, in a game in a high RT game state during which the bonus is carried over, it is possible to appropriately generate a "loss" in which the bonus does not win, so that the gambling of the game machine can be maintained. From the above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the player for the game in the high RT gaming state during the bonus carry-over.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the total number of credits and the number of inserted medals of the current medals is less than 3 in the game in the state between the 2MB flags, the player performs a MAX bet operation. However, the MAX bet operation is invalid. In this case, in the state between the 2MB flags, the two-card game by the MAX bet operation is not started, and the winning of the bonus "2MB" being carried over can be more reliably avoided.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the state between the 2MB flags, the game of the number of medals that is disadvantageous to the player cannot be played by the MAX bet operation. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even a player who has no knowledge of the game can play the game with peace of mind.

[Various effects obtained by lottery to shorten the cycle of normal games]
In the present embodiment, the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery performed during the normal game is the result of subtracting the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set, and the subtraction result is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games). In that case, the number of shortened games corresponding to the subtraction result is stocked. Then, the number of shortened games in stock is applied as the number of shortened games in the next set. In this case, from the start of the next set, the game is performed in a state where the game period in the non-AT state is shortened.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the normal game, it can be applied to the normal game of the next set without wasting the number of shortened games (privileges) that are surplus in the current set. It is possible to give the player an interest in the game. Further, in this case, since it is possible to generate a motivation for the player to execute the next set of normal games, it is possible to increase the operating rate of the game machine.

[Various effects obtained in pseudo BB games]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a pseudo BB game in which the payout of medals is increased, and when a pseudo BB lottery is won in a normal game or an AT game, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process. To. Therefore, the normal game is not a game that simply digests the game, but a game in which more medals can be obtained by a pseudo BB game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo BB game started during the normal game, even when the "loss" or the "rare role" is internally won, the cycle of the non-AT state game period (game period of the normal game). A shortened lottery will be held. Then, when the result of subtracting the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set by the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery at this time and the subtraction result is less than "0", the surplus corresponding to the subtraction result is obtained. The number of minutes shortened games is stocked. Then, the number of shortened games in stock is applied as the number of shortened games in the next set.

On the other hand, in the pseudo BB game started during the AT game, if the "loss" or "rare role" is internally won, an additional lottery for the number of AT games (directly added lottery) is performed, and the additional lottery is won. If so, the current number of remaining AT games will increase.

That is, in the pseudo BB game, the privilege given to the winning of the "loss" or "rare role" according to the type of the sub game state ("normal state" or "AT state") at the start of the pseudo BB game. The contents of can be different. Further, even in the pseudo BB game, it is possible to give a game value to "loss". Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the pseudo BB game.

Further, in the AT game in the state between the 2MB flags, not only the game of notifying the player of the small winning combination internally is performed, but also the pseudo BB game may be started, so that the state between the 2MB flags is in progress. It is possible to prevent the AT game from becoming a monotonous game.

[Various effects obtained in the game that determines the number of AT start games when "Kappa" wins]
In the AT start game number determination game when the "Kappa" wins in this embodiment, as described above, the character "Kappa" eats the sushi material that is sequentially served for each game according to the type of the internal winning role, and the sushi material is eaten. The number of AT start games is determined according to the type of sushi material eaten. That is, in this game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of "Kawado" victory, the number of basic stay games in the AT state (the number of AT start games) is not determined by one lottery, but extends over a plurality of games. , It is determined based on the type of the internal winning combination and the sushi material (game information) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player with respect to the acquisition game of the number of games in the AT state (the game of determining the number of AT start games).

Further, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when the "Kappa" wins in this embodiment, as described above, even if the internal winning role is "lost", the data (game information) of the sushi material from the next game onward is used. , May be converted to better data for the player. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to give a game value to the "loss" even in the AT start game number determination game, and it is possible to maintain the interest even when the "loss" is determined.

[Various effects obtained by AT lottery (race result lottery) based on the number of bells paid out during the cycle]
In the present embodiment, the number of medals paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed in each cycle of the non-AT state is counted by the bell payout number counter during the cycle. .. Then, with reference to the race result lottery table according to the value of the bell payout number counter during the cycle, it is determined by lottery whether or not the race result is a win (AT win). As a result, the probability that the start of AT is determined depends on the number of medals paid out based on the small winning combination of the bell. As a result, the process of determining the start of AT can be complicated, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, any one of "213 bells 1 to 8", "231 bells 1 to 8", "312 bells 1 to 8" or "321 bells 1 to 8" (pushing order bell) serves as an internal winning combination. By setting the pressing order of the stop button to "left middle right" and "left and right middle", the "control role" is always displayed as a stop and one medal is paid out. That is, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, if the push order of the stop button is set to "left middle right" or "left and right middle", the payout of medals in one cycle is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the payout of medals in one cycle is less than the second value (“27” in the present embodiment), the race result lottery table (No. 3) having a high probability of winning the AT is referred to. To. Therefore, the probability of winning the AT is higher when the number of medals paid out in one cycle is reduced. Therefore, during non-AT, for example, if the stop button pressing order is set to "left middle right" or "left and right middle", the player can arbitrarily notify that the payout of medals during one cycle will be reduced. It is possible to reduce the number of medals paid out.

Further, during non-AT, the push order in which the symbol combination related to the "CT bell" is stopped and displayed on the effective line may be notified with a predetermined probability. With this configuration, when the push order is notified during non-AT, the notification is followed (increases the number of medals paid out) or does not obey (reduces or sets the payout of medals to 0). Can be arbitrarily selected by the player.

In the present embodiment, when "213 bells 1 to 8", "231 bells 1 to 8", "312 bells 1 to 8" or "321 bells 1 to 8" are determined as internal winning medals, " When the stop operation is performed in a pressing order other than the pressing order of the stop buttons on which the "CT bell" can be stopped and displayed, the "controlling combination" is stopped and displayed, and one medal is paid out.

However, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the display combination in which a specific number of medals are paid out is stopped and displayed, and a predetermined number less than the specific number. It is also possible to provide a pressing order in which the display combination in which the medals are paid out is stopped and displayed.

For example, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the display combination in which 9 medals are paid out is stopped and displayed, and the display combination in which 3 medals are paid out is stopped and displayed. And may be provided. Further, the display combinations in which the three bells are paid out may be displayed in a corresponding pressing order, and may be stopped and displayed when a stop operation is performed on one reel at a predetermined timing. Three is the same value as the BET number of medals for starting one game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of medals to be paid out while eliminating the increase or decrease in the number of medals in one game by providing the pressing order in which the display combination in which the three medals are paid out is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of medals paid out (number of medals granted) is counted in the non-AT game state. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured to count values based on the number of medals paid out. For example, it may be configured to count the difference number of medals when the internal winning combination related to the bell is determined. In addition, when the display combination in which a specific number of medals are paid out is stopped and displayed, the first value (for example, "5") is counted, and the display combination in which a predetermined number of medals smaller than the specific number is paid out is stopped and displayed. In this case, a second value (for example, "1") different from the first value may be counted. Further, the first value and the second value may be determined by lottery for each cycle in the non-AT gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the total number of medals paid out by winning the small winning combination related to the bell in one cycle is small (when it is less than the second value), the AT winning probability is high. The result lottery table (No. 3) was made to be referred to. However, as the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, the race result lottery table to be referred to is determined according to the first place of the total number of medals paid out by winning the small winning combination related to the bell. May be good. Further, when the total number of medals paid out by winning the small winning combination related to the bell is large, the race result lottery table with a high probability of winning the AT may be referred to.

[Various effects obtained by managing the net increase in the number of sheets during AT]
In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the AT game period (the total number of medals) is equal to or greater than the specified number, the race win rate is rewritten to 100% (see S728 in FIG. 114). That is, the operation of the next AT is determined. As a result, it is accepted that it is preferable for the player to pay out medals during the AT game period. As a result, even if medals are paid out frequently during the AT game period, the interest of the game can be prevented from being lowered.

Further, for example, the MB (middle bonus) may be won during the AT game period so that medals equal to or greater than the number of medals paid out by winning a small winning combination related to the bell may be paid out. .. Even in this case, since it is accepted as preferable for the player to pay out medals during the AT game period, it is possible to prevent the game from being deteriorating. Further, in the MB during the AT game period, a small winning combination that is unlikely to be stopped and displayed during normal times (during non-MB) may be configured to be stopped and displayed. Then, a game property may be added that makes it easier to determine the addition of the number of AT games (AT payout number) when the small winning combination, which is unlikely to be stopped and displayed during normal times (non-MB), is stopped and displayed. ..

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11 may display the target number of medals obtained by subtracting the net increase number of medals paid out during the AT game period from the specified number of medals. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the conditions under which the transition to the next AT gaming state is determined. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the AT game period.

In the present embodiment, in the process at the start of the race_game, "0" is set in the bell payout counter during the cycle (the bell payout counter is updated during the cycle). However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured to set "0" to the bell payout counter during the cycle during the race. In this case, the value updated in the bell payout counter during the cycle during the race is treated as the next cycle.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the transition to the next AT gaming state is decided, the transition to the AT gaming state is notified to the player through the race. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured to start the next AT gaming state without going through the race (after the end of the AT gaming state) when the transition to the AT gaming state is determined. Good.

<Various deformation examples>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention have been described above, including their actions and effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various embodiments and modifications are included as long as the gist of the present invention described in the claims is not deviated. For example, the following various modifications can be considered.

[Modification 1]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a "loss" is won in a normal game or a pseudo BB game (when a single or continuous win is made), the game period (number of staying games) in the normal state is shortened (cycle shortening). There is a possibility that you can get the privilege. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above embodiment, if a "loss" is won in the AT game, there is a possibility that the privilege of adding the number of AT games can be obtained.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in games in a sub-game state other than the normal game, the pseudo BB game, and the AT game, a function of giving a privilege by winning a "loss" (one-time or continuous winning) is provided. You may. Therefore, in the first modification, a pachi-slot machine having a function of obtaining the privilege of winning the AT when a "loss" is won in the transition production game (race production) will be further described.

(1) During the race_Lottery table at the time of loss First, with reference to FIG. 129, the lottery table at the time of the loss during the race, which is necessary for executing the function of granting the above privilege (AT win) in the transition production game (race production), will be described. To do. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table during a race_miss. In addition, the lottery table at the time of losing _ during the race _ during the race _ during the game start processing (see FIG. 130 described later) described later, for example, the winning / non-winning of the race victory in the lottery processing at the time of losing (S919) It is referred to when determining the winning / non-winning of the AT game.

During the race_at the time of loss The lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning of the race victory and the lottery value for each value ("1" to "4") of the loss counter. The loss counter is a counter that manages (counts) the number of consecutive wins of "loss" during the race production period (10 games).

Therefore, for example, when "loss" is won three times in a row during the race production, the value of the loss counter becomes "3". Then, in this case, the probability of winning the race is 6554/32768, and the probability of winning the race is 26214/32768 (the race victory flag is ON). If the value of the loss counter is "1" (at the time of the first "loss" win), the race win is always non-win (AT non-win).

(2) Process at the start of the race during the race Next, the process at the start of the race during the race in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 130. The process at the start of the race in this example is also performed in S349 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the process at the time of receiving the start command of the above embodiment.

Further, in this example, the processing other than the processing during the race_game start by the sub-control circuit 101 is the same as that of the above embodiment. Therefore, here, only the process at the start of the race_game will be described.

As is clear from the comparison between the flowchart of the game start processing in this example shown in FIG. 130 and the flow chart of the game start processing of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 111, the race in this example The processes from S901 to S915 in the flowchart of the game start process are the same as the processes from S641 to S655 in the flow chart of the race-in-game_game start process of the above embodiment. Therefore, the description of the processes from S901 to S915 will be omitted here.

In this example, after the processing of S915 or when S913 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the result of the race result lottery is a non-winning race victory and the internal winning combination is "missing". Is determined (S916).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S916 that the determination condition of S916 is not satisfied (when the determination in S916 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets "0" in the loss counter (S917). Then, after the processing of S917, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S922 described later.

On the other hand, in S916, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S916 is satisfied (when the determination in S916 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the loss counter (S918). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the during-race_loss-time lottery table (see FIG. 129), and performs the during-race_loss-time lottery process based on the value of the loss counter after addition (S919).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the result of the lottery process during the race is a non-winning race victory (S920). In S920, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the result of the lottery process during the race is a non-winning race victory (when the determination in S920 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S922 described later.

On the other hand, in S920, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the result of the lottery process during the race is not a non-winning race victory (when the determination in S920 is NO), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag. (S921). Then, after the processing of S921, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S922 described later.

After the processing of S917 or S921, or when the determination in S920 is YES, the sub CPU 102 refers to the push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs the push order navigation lottery process of the small winning combination related to the "push order bell" (S922). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S923). Then, after the processing of S923, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of starting the game during the race, and shifts the processing to S356 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 87).

In the pachislot machine of the above-described modification 1, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and even in the transition effect state (during the race effect period), it is possible to give a game value to "loss". It is possible to improve the interest in the transition production game. In the first modification, when the "loss" is internally won once (when the value of the loss counter is "1"), the non-winning of the race victory is always determined. The configuration may be such that the winning of the race victory can be obtained with a predetermined probability even at the time of the first winning of "missing".

[Modification 2]
In the second modification, as in the first modification, a pachislot machine having a function of obtaining the benefit of AT winning when a "loss" is won in the transition production game (race production) (when the game is won once or continuously). Will be described. However, in this example, the lottery form of the AT lottery performed at the time of "missing" is changed from the above-mentioned modification 1.

Specifically, in this example, not only the winning / non-winning of the race win, but also the race win rate MAP lottery table determined at the start of the set (cycle) of the normal game according to the value of the loss counter (see FIG. 36). The re-lottery of the race win rate using the above will also be selectable. Therefore, the configuration of the lottery table during the race used in this example is different from that of the above-mentioned modification 1.

Here, with reference to FIG. 131, the lottery table during the race_loss at the time of the loss in the modification 2 will be described. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table during the race of this example. In this example as well, the during-race_lost lottery table is referred to, for example, in the above-described modification 1 of FIG. 130 during the race_during the game start processing_ during the losing lottery processing (S919). To.

In this example, the lottery table at the time of loss shows the types of lottery results (win / non-win of race win and re-lottery of race win rate) for each value of the loss counter ("1" to "3"). Define the correspondence with the lottery value. In this example as well, the value of the loss counter indicates the number of consecutive wins of "loss" during the race production period (10 games).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 131, when the value of the loss counter is "1", as a result of the lottery, a non-winning race victory is always obtained. When the value of the loss counter is "2", as a result of the lottery, a re-lottery of the race win rate is always obtained. Then, when the value of the loss counter is "3", the winning of the race victory is always obtained as the lottery result.

In this example, the value of the loss counter is "2" in the during-race_game start-time process (see FIG. 130 described later) during the race-loss-time lottery process (S919), and the player wins the re-lottery. In this case, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP lottery table determined at the start of the set in the process of S919, and redraws the race win rate data based on the set value.

In this example, it is configured in the same manner as the above-described modification 1 except that the lottery form of the AT lottery performed at the time of “loss” winning is different from the above-mentioned modification 1. Therefore, the same effect as that of the first modification can be obtained in the second modification. In the second modification, when the "loss" is internally won once (when the value of the loss counter is "1"), the non-winning of the race victory is always determined. The present invention is not limited to the above, and even at the time of one winning of "missing", at least one of the winning of the re-lottery of the race winning percentage and the winning of the race winning may be obtained with a predetermined probability.

[Modification 3]
In the above-mentioned modifications 1 and 2, a pachi-slot machine having a function of obtaining the privilege of AT winning when a "loss" is won (when winning once or continuously) in the transition production game (race production) has been described. , The present invention is not limited to this. In the transition production game, if a "loss" is won, another privilege may be given. For example, if a "loss" is won in a transition production game (one or consecutive wins), a pseudo BB game is won and stocked with a high probability over a predetermined number of games in an "additional challenge state" game. May be stocked.

In this case, the game in the "additional challenge state" stocked during the transition production game (race production) has a specific symbol combination ("yellow BAR"-"yellow BAR"-"yellow BAR") after the transition to the AT state. Stop is displayed on the valid line and started.

In the configuration of this example, the game after the transition to the AT state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the difference in game playability (advantage of the game) between the AT state and the other states is increased. Can be done. Therefore, in this example, the playability between the AT state and the other states can be sharpened, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Modification example 4]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a "loss" is won in a normal game or a pseudo BB game (when the game is won once or continuously), the game period (number of staying games) in the normal state is shortened (cycle shortening). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a "loss" is won in a normal game or a pseudo BB game (when a single or continuous win is made), the cycle shortening lottery may not be performed.

In this case, the configuration of the cycle shortening lottery table and the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table used in this example is the cycle shortening lottery table (see FIGS. 46 and 47) and the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table (see FIG. 48) of the above embodiment. ), The column that specifies the lottery value for "loss" is deleted.

As in this example, by configuring the configuration so that no privilege is given when a "loss" is won in a normal game or a pseudo BB game, the playability between the AT state and the other states (advantage of the game). The difference can be increased. Therefore, in this example, the playability between the AT state and the other states can be sharpened, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Modification 5]
In the above-described embodiment or the pachislot machines of the various modified examples, a configuration in which a predetermined privilege is given at the time of winning a "loss" in a plurality of types of sub-game states has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of sub Only in one of the sub-gaming states of the gaming state, the privilege granting function at the time of winning the "loss" may be provided.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is less than 3 in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) or the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state). In some cases, even if the player presses the MAX bet button 21, the operation is invalidated (see the MAXBET input process in FIG. 65), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is less than 3, the player performs a MAX bet operation while performing a specific operation (other than the MAX bet operation). , One or two medals may be selected as the number of medals to be hung (the number of bets).

In the modification 6, as an example thereof, when the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is less than 3 in the inter-flag state, the player presses a predetermined stop button. However, a configuration example will be described in which the number of medals to be hung can be selected as one or two by performing the MAX bet operation (while the predetermined stop button is pressed).

Specifically, in this example, the player presses the left stop button 19L when the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is less than 3 in the inter-flag state. However, when the MAX bet operation is performed, the number of medals to be hung is set to 1, and when the player performs the MAX bet operation while pressing the middle stop button 19C, the number of medals to be hung is set to 2. At the time of setting the number of medals to be hung as described above, whether or not the stop button is pressed and the type of the pressed stop button are connected to the input port of the main control circuit 91. It is determined by referring to the current input status of the stop switch (input port on / off information).

In this example, the processing contents other than the MAXBET input processing are the same as those in the above embodiment. Therefore, only the MAXBET input processing will be described here, and the description of other processes will be omitted. Further, since the pachislot configuration of this example is the same as that of the above embodiment, the description of the pachislot configuration will be omitted.

(1) MAXBET input processing Next, the content of the MAXBET input process in this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 132. The MAXBET insertion process of this example is also performed in S46 during the medal reception / start check process (see FIG. 64), as in the above embodiment.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MAX bet operation has been performed (S931).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S931 that the MAX bet operation has not been performed (when the determination in S931 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion process and performs the medal acceptance / start check process (FIG. 64). (See), move to S47. On the other hand, in S931, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MAX bet operation has been performed (when the determination in S931 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "2MB" or "3MB" is established (winning). Determine (S932).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S932 that "2MB" or "3MB" is not established (winning) (when the determination in S932 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S936 described later. On the other hand, in S932, when the main CPU 93 determines that "2MB" or "3MB" is established (winning) (when the determination in S932 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits. It is determined whether or not the total with (the number of stored sheets) is "3" or more (S933).

In S933, when the main CPU 93 determines that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is "3" or more (when the determination in S933 is YES), the main CPU 93 hangs medals. Set "3" to the number of sheets (S934). Then, after the processing of S934, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET input processing, and shifts the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 64).

On the other hand, in S933, when the main CPU 93 determines that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is not "3" or more (when the determination in S933 is NO), the main CPU 93 specifies the number of medals. The charging process is performed (S935). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets one or two medals to be hung, depending on the type of stop button pressed during the MAX bet operation. The details of the number-designated input process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133 described later. Then, after the processing of S935, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET input processing, and shifts the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 64).

Here, returning to the process of S932 again, when S932 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 93 is set with a predetermined number of medals that are credited (S936). At this time, one, two, or three pieces are set. Then, after the processing of S936, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET input processing, and shifts the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 64).

(2) Number-Specified Input Processing Next, the number-designated input process performed in S935 in the flowchart of the MAXBET input process of this example (see FIG. 132) will be described with reference to FIG. 133.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not only one stop button is currently pressed (whether or not only the state of the input port of one stop button is the on-edge state) (S941). In this process, the main CPU 93 of S941 is based on the on / off information of the input port of the stop button detected in the input port check process (S202) during the interrupt process (see FIG. 75) controlled by the main CPU 93. The determination process may be performed, or the main CPU 93 may check the status of the input port of the main control circuit 91 during the process of S941 and perform the determination process of S941.

In S941, when the main CPU 93 determines that only one stop button is not currently pressed (when the determination in S941 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the number-designated input process and inputs the MAXBET in this example. The process (see FIG. 132) also ends. That is, in this example, when the total number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is less than 3, the stop button is not pressed during the MAX bet operation, or a plurality of stop buttons. If is pressed, the MAX bet operation is invalid.

On the other hand, in S941, when the main CPU 93 determines that only one stop button is currently pressed (when the determination in S941 is YES), the main CPU 93 presses the left stop button 19L. It is determined whether or not there is (whether or not the state of the input port of the left stop button 19L is the on-edge state) (S942). In this process, the main CPU 93 of S942 is based on the on / off information of the input port of the stop button detected in the input port check process (S202) during the interrupt process (see FIG. 75) controlled by the main CPU 93. The determination process may be performed, or the main CPU 93 may check the status of the input port of the main control circuit 91 during the process of S942 and perform the determination process of S942.

In S942, when the main CPU 93 determines that the stop button being pressed is the left stop button 19L (when the determination in S942 is YES), the number of credits (stored number) of the main CPU 93 is "1" or more. Whether or not it is determined (S943).

In S943, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of credits (stored number) is not "1" or more (when the determination in S943 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the number-designated input process and inputs the MAXBET in this example. The process (see FIG. 132) also ends. That is, when the total number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is less than 3, even if the MAX bet operation is performed while pressing the left stop button 19L, the number of credits (stored number) remains. If it is 0, the MAX bet operation is invalid.

On the other hand, in S943, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of credits (stored number) is "1" or more (when the determination in S943 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets "1" in the number of medals to be multiplied. (S944). Then, after the processing of S944, the main CPU 93 ends the number-designated input processing, and also ends the MAXBET input processing (see FIG. 132) of this example.

Here, returning to the process of S942 again, when the main CPU 93 determines in S942 that the stop button being pressed is not the left stop button 19L (when the determination in S942 is NO), the main CPU 93 is currently pressed. It is determined whether or not the stopped button being pressed is the middle stop button 19C (whether or not the state of the input port of the middle stop button 19C is the on-edge state) (S945). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S942 described above, the main CPU 93 is the input port of the stop button detected in the input port check process (S202) during the interrupt process (see FIG. 75) controlled by the main CPU 93. The determination process of S945 may be performed based on the on / off information of S945, or at the time of processing S945, the main CPU 93 checks the status of the input port of the main control circuit 91 and performs the determination process of S945. May be good.

In S945, when the main CPU 93 determines that the stop button being pressed is not the middle stop button 19C (when the determination in S945 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the number-designated input process and inputs the MAXBET in this example. The process (see FIG. 132) also ends. That is, in this example, when the total number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is less than 3, even if the MAX bet operation is performed while pressing the right stop button 19R, the MAX bet is performed. The operation is invalid.

On the other hand, in S945, when the main CPU 93 determines that the stop button being pressed is the middle stop button 19C (when the determination in S945 is YES), the number of credits (stored number) of the main CPU 93 is "2" or more. It is determined whether or not it is (S946).

In S946, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of credits (stored number) is not "2" or more (when the determination in S946 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the number-designated input process and inputs the MAXBET in this example. The process (see FIG. 132) also ends. That is, when the total number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is less than 3, even if the MAX bet operation is performed while pressing the middle stop button 19C, the number of credits (stored number) remains. If it is less than one, the MAX bet operation is invalid.

On the other hand, in S946, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of credits (stored number) is "2" or more (when the determination in S946 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets "2" to the number of medals to be hung. (S947). Then, after the processing of S947, the main CPU 93 ends the number-designated input processing, and also ends the MAXBET input processing (see FIG. 132) of this example.

As described above, in the pachislot machine of this example, in the game in the 2MB flag state or the 3MB flag state, if the total number of credits and the number of inserted medals is less than 3, the player MAX. Even if the betting operation is performed, if the predetermined stop button is not pressed at that time, the MAX betting operation is invalid. Therefore, in this example as well, as in the above embodiment, it becomes difficult to start the two-card game by the MAX bet operation in the state between the 2MB flags, and the winning of the bonus "2MB" being carried over is more reliably avoided. be able to. That is, in this example, the same effect as that of the above embodiment can be obtained.

Further, when the method of setting the number of medals to be hung during the MAX bet operation of this example described above is adopted, even if the number of medals is not set only by the MAX bet operation, MAX is pressed while pressing the stop button corresponding to the number of medals. By performing the betting operation, the player can arbitrarily and easily select the number of medals to be hung.

Further, in the method of setting the number of medals to be hung during the MAX bet operation in this example, the operation is performed while pressing the stop button corresponding to the number of medals, but finally, the player desires by the MAX bet operation. Since the number of medals to be hung will be put into the game, it does not interfere with the flow of the game. Further, in a gaming machine provided with a regulation that the number of medals to be hung is set only by a MAX bet operation, when a function is provided in which a player can arbitrarily select a predetermined number of medals from a plurality of types of medals. By adopting the technique for setting the number of medals to be hung during the MAX bet operation in this example, such a specification change can be easily and at low cost.

In the modified example 6, the stop button corresponding to the one-sheet hanging is the left stop button 19L, and the stop button corresponding to the two-sheet hanging is the middle stop button 19C, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. The combination of the number of medals to be set and the type of stop button to be pressed can be arbitrarily set.

Further, the technique for setting the number of medals to be placed during the MAX bet operation of the modification 6 can be applied to a game machine in which the MAX bet operation is controlled exclusively for placing two medals. In this case, for example, when the player performs a MAX bet operation while pressing the right stop button 19R, the number of medals to be hung is controlled to be set to three.

[Modification 7]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment, various lottery related to the granting of benefits to the player is performed in each period of the normal game and the AT game. Specifically, in the normal game, pseudo BB lottery, cycle shortening lottery, race victory expectation data UP lottery processing and the like are performed (see FIGS. 101 and 102), and in the AT game, pseudo BB lottery and the number of AT games are performed. Additional lottery, push order navigation lottery, etc. are performed (see FIG. 111).

The winning probability of the privilege in these lottery and the amount of the privilege that can be obtained (the number of shortened games and the number of additional games to be given) are constant in each period of the normal game and the AT game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a function capable of increasing (increasing) the winning probability of the award in these lottery, the amount of the award that can be obtained, etc. in each period of the normal game and the AT game (hereinafter referred to as , "Winning rate UP function"), and a function that allows the player to arbitrarily select the function may be provided.

In the modified example 7, an example in which the winning rate UP function and the selection function thereof are provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment will be described.

In the winning rate UP function of this example, after the start of operation of the function, a period of a predetermined number of games and a period during which various lottery related to benefits are not executed (hereinafter referred to as "no lottery period") are provided. Then, after the non-lottery period ends, a lottery table in which the winning probability of the privilege and / or the amount of the privilege that can be obtained (winning possible) increases during the period of a specific number of games (hereinafter referred to as "winning rate UP period") Refer to it and execute various lottery related to benefits. That is, in this example, the operating period of the winning rate UP function is composed of a no-lottery period and a winning rate UP period, and the operating period of the winning rate UP function is a predetermined number of games in the winning rate UP function and a winning rate UP period. It is the sum of the specific number of games.

(1) Outline of Winning Rate UP Function First, an outline of operation of the winning rate UP function during a normal game will be described. In this example, when a specific condition is satisfied at the start of the normal game, a selection effect is performed in which the player can select whether or not to activate the winning rate UP function. In this example, the selection effect is performed by using the liquid crystal display device 11.

Then, in this selection effect, when the player selects the operation of the winning rate UP function, the operation of the winning rate UP function is started from the game. On the other hand, in this selection effect, if the player does not select the operation of the winning rate UP function, the winning rate UP function does not operate, and the normal game operation when the winning rate UP function is not activated is continuously executed. Will be done.

When the player selects the winning rate UP function during a normal game, first, from the game in which the selection effect is executed, a predetermined number of games (no lottery period), pseudo BB lottery, cycle shortening lottery, race victory expectation data UP lottery etc. are not performed. Next, after the end of the no-lottery period, the player performs the winning rate UP function for each lottery such as a period of a specific number of games (winning rate UP period), a pseudo BB lottery, a cycle shortening lottery, and a race victory expectation data UP lottery. Compared to the lottery table referred to when not selected (see FIGS. 40, 43 and 44, the lottery table for the race victory expectation data UP lottery is not shown), the winning probability of the award and / or the award that can be obtained Is executed with reference to a lottery table in which the amount (number of shortened games) of is increased (increased).

Next, the operation outline of the winning rate UP function during the AT game will be described. In this example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of the AT game, a selection effect is performed in which the player can select whether or not to activate the winning rate UP function. Then, when the player selects the operation of the winning rate UP function in the selection effect, the operation of the winning rate UP function is started from the game. On the other hand, if the player does not select the operation of the winning rate UP function in the selection effect, the winning rate UP function does not operate and the AT game operation when the winning rate UP function is not activated is continuously executed. Will be done.

When the player selects the winning rate UP function during the AT game, first, from the game in which the selection effect is executed, a predetermined number of games (no lottery period), a pseudo BB lottery, an additional lottery for the number of AT games, and a push order. Navi lottery is not done. Next, after the end of the no-lottery period, the player performs the winning rate UP function for each lottery such as a specific number of games period (winning rate UP period), pseudo BB lottery, additional lottery for the number of AT games, and push order navigation lottery. Compared to the lottery table referred to when not selected (see FIGS. 41, 45 and 46, the lottery table for push order navigation lottery is not shown), the winning probability of the award and / or the amount of award that can be obtained ( It is executed with reference to the lottery table where the number of additional games) increases.

In each period of the normal game and the AT game, the number of times the winning rate UP function is operated may be limited to one, or the winning rate UP function may be executed a plurality of times. Further, in the latter case, the operating period of the winning rate UP function may be changed or constant for each execution of the function. Further, in the latter case, an upper limit may or may not be set for the number of times the winning rate UP function is executed.

Further, in this example, the lottery-free period and the winning rate UP period can be arbitrarily set, and both periods may be the same or different from each other. Further, the operating period of the winning rate UP function during the normal game may be the same as or different from the operating period of the winning rate UP function during the AT game.

Further, in this example, the operating period of the winning rate UP function in the normal game is set to end within the normal game period, and the operating period of the winning rate UP function in the AT game ends within the AT game period. Is set to.

Then, in the normal game, the timing at which the selection effect of the winning rate UP function occurs (the condition under which the operation of the winning rate UP function can be started) is the timing when the operation of the winning rate UP function ends within the normal game period. It can be set arbitrarily.

For example, in the winning rate UP function of a normal game, when the non-lottery period is 10 games and the winning rate UP period is 10 games (when the operating period of the winning rate UP function is 20 games), for example, the said The winning rate UP function can be activated in a state where the number of remaining games of the normal game in the cycle is 20 games or more (the value of the cycle counter is "19" or more). In this case, for example, if the number of remaining games in the normal game is 20 games or more, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be generated for each game, or the number of remaining games in the normal game is 20 games. In the above state, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be generated at predetermined game number intervals.

Further, for example, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be generated only when the number of remaining games in the normal game reaches a specific number of games equal to or longer than the operating period of the winning rate UP function. In this configuration, when the number of remaining games is larger than the number of specific games and the cycle shortening lottery is won, and as a result, the number of remaining games is less than the specific number of games without becoming the specific number of games. In order to end the operation of the winning rate UP function within the normal game period, the operating period of the winning rate UP function may be shortened, or the winning rate UP function may not operate.

In the former configuration (configuration that shortens the operating period of the winning rate UP function), for example, when the operating period of the preset winning rate UP function is 20 games and the number of remaining games in the normal game reaches 20 games. When the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is set to occur, the number of remaining games is 30 games, and the number of shortened games is 11 games by the cycle shortening lottery, and the number of remaining games is 19 games. Occasionally, the operating period of the winning rate UP function may be shortened to 19 games. In this case, the no-lottery period may be 9 games and the winning rate UP period may be 10 games, or the no-lottery period may be 10 games and the winning rate UP period may be 9 games. When such a configuration is adopted, the winning rate UP function can be activated flexibly with respect to the progress of the game.

Further, in the AT game, the timing at which the selection effect of the winning rate UP function occurs (the condition under which the operation of the winning rate UP function can be started) is also the timing when the operation of the winning rate UP function ends within the AT game period. , Can be set arbitrarily.

For example, in the winning rate UP function of the AT game, when the non-lottery period is 5 games and the winning rate UP period is 5 games (when the operating period of the winning rate UP function is 10 games), the AT game When the number of remaining games is 10 games or more (the value of the number of remaining AT games is "9" or more), the selection effect of the winning rate UP function can be generated. In this case, for example, if the number of remaining games in the AT game is 10 or more, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be generated for each game, or the number of remaining games in the AT game is 10 games. In the above state, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be generated at predetermined game number intervals. Further, for example, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be generated only when the number of remaining games of the AT game reaches a specific number of games of 10 games or more (the operating period of the winning rate UP function or more). ..

As described above, in this example, the operation period of the winning rate UP function and the timing at which the selection effect of the winning rate UP function occurs (specific condition for starting the operation of the winning rate UP function) in the normal game are applicable. The operation period of the lottery rate UP function is appropriately set so as not to straddle between the normal game and the transition effect game. Further, in the AT game, the operation period of the winning rate UP function and the timing at which the selection effect of the winning rate UP function occurs (predetermined condition for starting the operation of the winning rate UP function) are the operating periods of the corresponding winning rate UP function. Is appropriately set so as not to straddle between the AT game and the transition effect game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The operating period of the winning rate UP function in the normal game may span between the normal game and the transition effect game, and the operating period of the winning rate UP function in the AT game may span between the AT game and the transition effect game. In this case, within the operating period of the winning rate UP function, for example, in the game after the game state shifts (transition production game), the winning probability of the privilege and the amount of the privilege that can be acquired increase (increase). Various lottery tables that will be subsequently secured will be prepared separately so that the winning rate UP function will continue to operate even in the gaming state after the transition.

In each period of the normal game and the AT game, if the pseudo BB game is started by winning the pseudo BB lottery during the operation period of the winning rate UP function, the number of digested games in the pseudo BB game period is calculated. It is not counted in the number of digested games during the operation period of the winning rate UP function. In addition, when the pseudo BB game is executed during the operation period of the winning rate UP function, various lottery related to the privilege performed in the pseudo BB game is the winning probability of the privilege and / or the amount of the privilege that can be won (shortened game). You may execute by referring to the lottery table where the number, the number of additional games, etc.) increases.

Further, in the period of the AT game, if the winning additional AT game number (lottery result) is won for each winning game during the operation period of the winning rate UP function, the remaining AT game number (lottery result) remains. It may be added to the number, or at the end of the winning rate UP function of the AT game, the total number of additional AT games acquired during the operation period of the function may be collectively added to the remaining number of AT games.

If the former mode (a mode in which the number of additional AT games won for each winning game is added to the number of remaining AT games) is adopted, the winning rate is again before the operating winning rate UP function is completed. There is a possibility that the conditions for generating the selection effect of the UP function are satisfied. For example, when the operating period of the winning rate UP function in the AT game is set to 20 games and the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is set to occur when the number of remaining AT games reaches 20 games, the remaining AT When the number of games is 9 games (during the operation period of the winning rate UP function), the number of additional AT games of 15 games is won by a direct lottery, and the number of additional AT games won in the game is added to the number of remaining AT games. At that point, the number of remaining AT games is 24. In this case, before the currently operating winning rate UP function ends, the number of remaining AT games may become 20 games again, and the condition for generating the selection effect of the winning rate UP function may be satisfied. When such a situation occurs, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is prevented from occurring.

The operation control of the winning rate UP function described above is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in this example, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means for determining whether or not to grant a predetermined privilege and / or a process for determining the amount of the predetermined privilege to be granted (privilege granting determination means), and A means of executing an effect in which the player can select whether or not to increase the probability that a predetermined privilege is granted and / or the amount of the predetermined privilege that can be granted when a specific condition is satisfied (privilege winning rate). It also serves as an ascending selection means).

(2) Various lottery tables Next, in this example, an example of various lottery tables used during the operating period of the winning rate UP function (winning rate UP period) will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 135.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo BB lottery (general, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table used during the operation of the winning rate UP function during the normal game period. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo BB lottery (during AT, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table used during the operation of the winning rate UP function during the AT game. FIGS. 136 and 137 are diagrams showing an example of a cycle shortening lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) used during the operation of the winning rate UP function during the normal game period. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) used during the operation of the winning rate UP function during the AT game. Further, FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of a direct-added lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) used during the operation of the winning rate UP function during the AT game. Here, as in the above embodiment, the drawing of the lottery table for the race victory expectation data UP lottery and the lottery table for the push order navigation lottery used while the winning rate UP function is operating is omitted.

The configuration of each lottery table is a lottery table used when the winning rate UP function is not operating, that is, the corresponding lottery table described in the above embodiment (see FIGS. 40, 41, 43 to 46). Since it is the same as the above, the description of the configuration of each lottery table will be omitted. However, in each lottery table used while the winning rate UP function is operating, the setting of the lottery value is different from that of the lottery table used when the winning rate UP function is not operating. Specifically, in each lottery table used during the winning rate UP function, the winning probability and / of the privilege specified in the lottery table are compared with the lottery table used when the winning rate UP function is not operating. Alternatively, the lottery value is appropriately set so that the amount of benefits that can be obtained increases (increases).

For example, the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table of FIG. 40 used when the winning rate UP function is not activated and the pseudo BB lottery (general middle, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table of FIG. 134 used when the winning rate UP function is activated. In the pseudo BB lottery (general middle, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table of FIG. 134, the winning column of the pseudo BB game (“BB winning”) in the internal winning combination that is the target of the lottery other than the “fixed winning combination” The lottery value specified in the column) is larger than that of the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table of FIG. 40, and the winning probability of the pseudo BB game is high. Further, for example, the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / racing) table of FIG. 41 used when the winning rate UP function is not activated and the pseudo BB lottery (during AT) of FIG. 135 used when the winning rate UP function is activated. , When the winning rate UP function is selected) In the pseudo BB lottery (during AT, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table, the pseudo BB is used for the internal winning combination other than the “fixed combination”. The lottery value specified in the winning column of the game (“BB winning” column) is larger than that of the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / preparing / racing) table in FIG. 41, and the winning of the pseudo BB game The probability is high.

Further, for example, the cycle shortening lottery table of FIGS. 43 and 44 used when the winning rate UP function is not activated, and the cycle shortening lottery table of FIGS. 136 and 137 used when the winning rate UP function is activated (when the winning rate UP function is selected). ), In the cycle shortening lottery table of FIGS. 136 and 137 (when the winning rate UP function is selected), it can be obtained in the internal winning combination that is the target of the lottery other than "5 bells" and "3 rare roles". The lottery value is set so that the number of shortened games is larger than that of the cycle shortened lottery table of FIGS. 43 and 44. Further, in the cycle shortening lottery table of FIGS. 136 and 137 (when the winning rate UP function is selected), the internal winning combination is "missing", "missing 2 stations", "loss 3 stations", "lip 3 stations" or "weak". The lottery value is set so that the probability of winning the number of shortened games in the case of "first shot" is also larger than that of the cycle shortened lottery table of FIGS. 43 and 44.

Further, for example, the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table of FIG. 45 used when the winning rate UP function is not activated and the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table of FIG. 138 used when the winning rate UP function is activated (when the winning rate UP function is selected). In the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table of FIG. 138 (when the winning rate UP function is selected), the number of shortened games that can be obtained in the internal winning combination that is the target of the lottery other than the "reach eye lip" and the "fixed combination" is , The lottery value is set to be larger than that of the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table of FIG. 45. Further, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table of FIG. 138 (when the winning rate UP function is selected), when the internal winning combination is "normal lip", "pushing order bell" or "three bells", the number of shortened games is won. The lottery value is set so that the probability of this is also larger than that of the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table of FIG. 45.

Further, for example, when comparing the direct addition lottery table of FIG. 46 used when the winning rate UP function is not activated and the direct addition lottery table of FIG. 139 used when the winning rate UP function is activated (when the winning rate UP function is selected), In the direct addition reduced lottery table of FIG. 139 (when the winning rate UP function is selected), the number of additional games that can be obtained in all the internal winning combinations to be drawn is larger than that of the direct addition lottery table of FIG. 46. The lottery value is set so as to be. In addition, in the direct addition lottery table of FIG. 139 (when the winning rate UP function is selected), the probability of winning the number of additional games when the internal winning combination is "missing", "weak che" or "watermelon" is also shown in FIG. 46. The lottery value is set so that it is larger than that of the lottery table directly above.

(3) Various related processes of the winning rate UP function Next, specific examples of various processes related to the execution of the above-mentioned winning rate UP function will be described. The execution process of the winning rate UP function in this example is controlled by the sub-control circuit 101, but other processes are executed in the same manner as in the above embodiment. Therefore, here, various processes related to the execution of the winning rate UP function (general middle _ game start processing, winning rate UP function selection processing, general middle _ winning rate UP function selection lottery processing, AT _ Only the processing at the start of the game and the lottery processing when the winning rate UP function is selected during AT will be described, and the description of various other processing will be omitted.

In the execution processing example of the winning rate UP function described below, the operating period of the winning rate UP function in both the normal game and the AT game is 20 games, the non-lottery period is 10 games, and the winning rate UP period is. There are 10 games.

In addition, at the timing when the selection effect of the winning rate UP function occurs during the normal game period (specific condition that the winning rate UP function can be started to operate), the number of remaining games in the normal game is 40 games (the value of the cycle counter is "39". ”). On the other hand, at the timing when the selection effect of the winning rate UP function occurs during the AT game period (a predetermined condition for starting the operation of the winning rate UP function), the number of remaining AT games is 20 games (the value of the number of remaining AT games is It is assumed that it becomes "19"). In this case, the operation period of the winning rate UP function does not span between the normal game and the transition effect game, or between the AT game and the transition effect game.

Further, if the winning rate UP function is activated during the AT game period and the winning additional AT game number is won, the winning additional AT game number (lottery result) is the remaining number of AT games for each winning game. Shall be added to. Further, when a pseudo BB game is won during the operation period of the winning rate UP function and the pseudo BB game is executed as an interrupt process, the number of games digested by the pseudo BB game is the winning rate UP function. It shall not be counted in the number of digested games during the operating period. The various operating conditions of the above-mentioned winning rate UP function are not limited to this example.

(3-1) General Medium_Game Start Processing First, the general medium_game start processing in this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. Note that the general middle-game start processing of this example is also performed in S345 in the flowchart (see FIG. 84) of the start command reception processing, as in the above embodiment.

When the general middle-game start processing of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processing of S1001 to S1018 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 140. The processing of S1001 to S1018 in the general middle_game start processing of this example is the same as the processing of S551 to S568 in the flowchart of the general middle_game start processing of the above embodiment shown in FIGS. 101 and 102. Is done. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1001 to S1018 will be omitted here.

After the processing of S1004 or S1018, or when S1005 or S1014 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the condition for generating the selection effect of the winning rate UP function (condition for starting the operation of the winning rate UP function) is satisfied. (In this example, whether or not the value of the cycle counter is "39") is determined (S1019). That is, in this determination process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current game is a game that executes the selection effect of the winning rate UP function.

In S1019, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the condition for generating the winning rate UP function selection effect is not satisfied (NO in S1019), that is, the current game executes the winning rate UP function selection effect. If it is not a game, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1021 described later.

On the other hand, in S1019, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the condition for generating the winning rate UP function selection effect is satisfied (when S1019 is YES determination), that is, the current game performs the winning rate UP function selection effect. In the case of a game to be executed, the sub CPU 102 performs a winning rate UP function selection process (S1020). In this process, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is executed, and the player can determine whether or not the winning rate UP function is activated. The details of the winning rate UP function selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 142 described later.

After the processing of S1020 or when the determination in S1019 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning rate UP flag is in the ON state (S1021). The winning rate UP flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current game is a game within the operating period of the winning rate UP function, and the player selects the winning rate UP function in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function. When it is turned on ("1" is set). Then, when the operation of the winning rate UP function is completed, the winning rate UP flag is turned off (“0” is set). The winning rate UP flag is stored in the sub RAM 103.

In S1021, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning rate UP flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S1021 is YES), that is, in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function executed in the current game, the player wins the winning rate. When the operation of the UP function is selected, or when the current game is a game in the middle of the operation period of the winning rate UP function, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process when the general middle _ winning rate UP function is selected (S1022). In this process, the lottery process of various benefits during the operation period of the winning rate UP function is mainly performed. The details of the lottery process when the general middle _ winning rate UP function is selected will be described later with reference to FIG. 143 described later. Then, after the processing of S1022, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle-game start processing of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 84).

On the other hand, in S1021, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning rate UP flag is not in the ON state (when the winning rate UP flag is NO), that is, in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function executed in the current game, the player wins. When the operation of the rate UP function is not selected, or when the current game is a game within the non-operation period of the winning rate UP function, the sub CPU 102 performs the processes S1023 to S1031 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 141. The processing of S1023 to S1031 in the general middle_game start processing of this example is the same as the processing of S569 to S577 in the flowchart of the general middle_game start processing of the above embodiment shown in FIGS. 101 and 102. Is done. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1023 to S1031 will be omitted here.

In the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 103) performed in S1023 of this example, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table (see FIG. 40) when the winning rate UP function is not activated. Pseudo BB lottery processing is performed. Further, in the cycle shortening related process performed in S1024 of this example, the sub CPU 102 performs the cycle shortening lottery with reference to the cycle shortening lottery table (see FIGS. 43 and 44) when the winning rate UP function is not activated.

Then, after the processing of S1028 or S1031, or when the determination of S1029 is NO, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle-game start processing of this example, and the processing is performed in S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 84). Move to.

(3-2) Winning rate UP function selection process Next, referring to FIG. 142, the winning rate UP function performed in S1020 in the flowchart (see FIGS. 140 and 141) of the general middle-game start processing of this example. The selection process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an effect image (win rate UP function selection screen) on the liquid crystal screen on which the winning rate UP function can be selected (S1041). By this process, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is started, and the player can determine the selection / non-selection of the operation of the winning rate UP function on the winning rate UP function selection screen.

In the winning rate UP function selection screen displayed on the liquid crystal screen in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function, for example, "selected" and "unselected" selection images of the winning rate UP function are displayed. Then, the player operates various operation buttons provided on the front door 2b to select either "selected" or "unselected" of the winning rate UP function, so that the winning rate UP function is activated or not. Be selected.

However, the configuration of the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is not limited to this example, and any configuration can be applied as long as the player can select whether or not to operate the winning rate UP function. For example, in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function, if the selection operation is not performed by the player within a predetermined time after the winning rate UP function selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, the winning rate UP function is selected. One of the "selected" and "unselected" functions may be automatically selected. Further, for example, the progress of the game may be in a standby state from the time when the winning rate UP function selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen until the selection operation is performed by the player.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the player has selected the operation of the winning rate UP function on the winning rate UP function selection screen (S1042).

In S1042, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the player has not selected the operation of the winning rate UP function (when the determination in S1042 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the winning rate UP function selection process and performs the process. General _ Move to S1021 of game start processing (see FIGS. 140 and 141).

On the other hand, in S1042, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the player has selected the operation of the winning rate UP function (when the determination in S1042 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the winning rate UP flag (S1043). ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "20" (the number of games in the operating period of the winning rate UP function) in the winning rate UP period counter (S1044). The winning rate UP period counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games in which the winning rate UP function is operated, and is stored in the sub RAM 103. During the operating period of the winning rate UP function, the value of the winning rate UP period counter is subtracted by "1" every game. Then, after the processing of S1044, the sub CPU 102 ends the winning rate UP function selection processing, and shifts the processing to S1021 of the general middle-game start processing (see FIGS. 140 and 141).

(3-3) Lottery process when the general medium_win rate UP function is selected Next, with reference to FIG. 143, in S1022 in the flowchart (see FIGS. 140 and 141) of the general medium_game start process of this example. The lottery process when the winning rate UP function is selected will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the winning rate UP period counter is a value of "1" to "10" (whether or not the winning rate is UP period) (S1051).

In S1051, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is not a value of "1" to "10" (when the determination in S1051 is NO), that is, the current game is a game within the lottery period. If there is, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1061 described later. In this case, since the processes of S1052 to S1060 described later are not performed, various lottery processes related to the privilege (pseudo BB lottery process, cycle shortening lottery process, race win rate expectation data UP lottery process, etc.) are not performed.

On the other hand, in S1051, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is a value of "1" to "10" (when the determination in S1051 is YES), that is, the current game is in the winning rate UP period. In the case of the game in, the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery process (S1052). The pseudo BB lottery process is performed in the same manner as the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 103) described in the above embodiment. However, in the pseudo BB lottery process performed at this time, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB lottery (general, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table (see FIG. 134) when the winning rate UP function is activated, and pseudo BB lottery processing is performed. Therefore, in the pseudo BB lottery process of S1052, the winning probability of the pseudo BB game (privilege) is higher than that when the winning rate UP function is not activated.

In addition, if a pseudo BB lottery is won during the operation period of the winning percentage UP function (winning a general middle BB game) and a pseudo BB game is executed as interrupt processing, various benefits performed in the pseudo BB game. In the lottery processing (pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery, push order navigation lottery, and race winning percentage UP lottery: see FIG. 104), the lottery table when the winning percentage UP function is activated is referred to, respectively.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs cycle shortening related processing (S1053). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the cycle shortening lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) (see FIGS. 136 and 137) when the winning rate UP function is activated, and is based on the data of the “winning combination history”. Perform a cycle shortening lottery. Therefore, in the cycle shortening lottery process of S1053, the winning probability of the shortened game (privilege) and / or the number of shortened games that can be acquired is increased as compared with that when the winning rate UP function is not activated.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is "10" or more and the "race generation flag" is in the off state (S1054).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1054 that the determination condition of S1054 is not satisfied (when the determination in S1054 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the "accommodation point" in the lottery result of the cycle shortening lottery determined in S1053. The number of corresponding shortened games is added (S1055).

After the processing of S1055, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race victory expectation degree lottery table (not shown) when the winning rate UP function is activated, and performs the race victory expectation degree data up lottery (S1056). Therefore, in the race win expectation data up lottery of S1056, the winning probability of the race win expectation data up (privilege) and / or the degree of increase in the available race win expectation data is the winning rate UP function when the winning rate UP function is not activated. It will increase in comparison.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the race win expectation data up lottery in the race win rate data (S1057). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1061 described later.

Here, returning to the process of S1054 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1054 that the determination condition of S1054 is satisfied (when the determination in S1054 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is determined in S1053 from the value of the cycle counter. The lottery result (number of shortened games) of the cycle shortening lottery is subtracted, and the calculation result is set to the value of the cycle counter. Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the period counter after subtraction is less than "10" (S1058).

In S1058, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the period counter after subtraction is not less than "10" (when the determination in S1058 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1061 described later.

On the other hand, in S1058, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is less than "10" (when the determination in S1058 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a surplus corresponding to the calculation (subtraction) result. The number of shortened games of is added to the "inn points" (S1059). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter to "10" (S1060). Then, after the processing of S1060, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S1061 described later.

After processing S1057 or S1060, or when S1051 or S1058 determines NO, the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the value of the winning rate UP period counter (S1061). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the winning rate UP period counter is “0” (S1062).

In S1062, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is not "0" (when the determination in S1062 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery process when the general middle _ winning rate UP function is selected. At the same time, the processing at the start of the general game (see FIGS. 140 and 141) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S1062, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is "0" (when the determination in S1062 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the winning rate UP flag (S1063). ). By this process, the operation of the winning rate UP function during the normal game period ends. Then, after the process of S1063, the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery process when the general middle _ winning rate UP function is selected, and also ends the general middle _ game start process (see FIGS. 140 and 141).

(3-4) During AT_Game Start Process Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the AT during AT_game start process in this example will be described. Note that the AT-game start processing of this example is also performed in S353 in the flowchart (see FIG. 84) of the start command reception processing, as in the above embodiment.

When the AT-game start processing of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processing of S1071 to S1077 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 144. It should be noted that the processing of S1071 to S1077 in the processing at the start of the AT_game of this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S711 to S717 in the flowchart of the processing at the start of the AT_game of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 111. .. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1071 to S1077 will be omitted here.

After the processing of S1077 or when the determination of S1073 is NO, the sub CPU 102 satisfies the condition for generating the selection effect of the winning rate UP function (in this example, whether or not the value of the number of remaining AT games is "19"). In addition, it is determined whether or not the winning rate UP flag is in the off state (S1078).

In the determination process of S1078, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current game is a game that executes the selection effect of the winning rate UP function. As described above, the number of AT games is added to the lottery (directly added lottery). In the embodiment in which the number of additional AT games won in) is added to the number of remaining AT games for each winning game, the value of the number of remaining AT games is set to "19" again before the currently operating winning rate UP function ends. (The condition for generating the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is satisfied). In this example, in consideration of this case as well, not only the generation condition of the selection effect of the winning rate UP function but also the on / off state of the winning rate UP flag is added as a discrimination parameter. Even if the value of the number of remaining AT games becomes "19" again before the winning rate UP function currently in operation ends, in this case, the winning rate UP flag is on, so the determination of S1078 is made. The result is a NO determination, and the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is not executed.

In S1078, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1078 is not satisfied (when the determination in S1078 is NO), that is, when the current game is not a game that executes the selection effect of the winning rate UP function, the sub CPU 102 determines. The processing of S1080 described later is performed.

On the other hand, in S1078, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1078 is satisfied (when the determination in S1078 is YES), that is, when the current game is a game that executes the selection effect of the winning rate UP function, the sub CPU 102 Performs the winning rate UP function selection process described with reference to FIG. 142 (S1079). In this process, the selection effect of the winning rate UP function is executed, and the player can determine the selection / non-selection of the operation of the winning rate UP function.

After the processing of S1079 or when the determination in S1078 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning rate UP flag is in the ON state (S1080).

In S1080, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning rate UP flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S1080 is YES), that is, in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function executed in the current game, the player wins the winning rate. When the operation of the UP function is selected, or when the current game is a game in the middle of the operation period of the winning rate UP function, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process when the winning rate UP function is selected during AT (S1081). In this process, the lottery process of various benefits during the operation period of the winning rate UP function is mainly performed. The details of the lottery process when the AT-winning rate UP function is selected will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 described later. Then, after the processing of S1081, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-game start processing of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 84).

On the other hand, in S1080, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning rate UP flag is not in the ON state (when the winning rate UP flag is NO), that is, in the selection effect of the winning rate UP function executed in the current game, the player wins. When the operation of the rate UP function is not selected or the current game is a game within the non-operation period of the winning rate UP function, the sub CPU 102 performs the processes of S1082 to S1086 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 144. It should be noted that the processing of S1082 to S1086 in the AT-game start processing of this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S718 to S722 in the flowchart of the AT-game start processing of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 111. .. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1082 to S1086 will be omitted here.

In the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 103) performed in S1082 of this example, the sub CPU 102 uses the pseudo BB lottery (during AT, during AT preparation, during race) table (FIG. 41) when the winning rate UP function is not activated. Refer to), and perform the pseudo BB lottery process. Further, in the direct addition lottery process performed in S1083 of this example, the sub CPU 102 is in the case where the winning rate UP function is not activated.
With reference to the direct-added lottery table (see FIG. 46), the number of AT-added games is drawn. Further, in the push order navigation lottery process performed in S1085 of this example, the sub CPU 102 performs the push order navigation lottery with reference to the push order navigation lottery table (not shown) when the winning rate UP function is not activated.

Then, after the processing of S1086, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-game start processing of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 84).

(3-5) During AT_Lottery process when the winning rate UP function is selected Next, with reference to FIG. 145, during AT performed in S1081 in the flowchart of the process at the start of AT_game (see FIG. 144) of this example. _The lottery process when the winning rate UP function is selected will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the winning rate UP period counter is a value of "1" to "10" (whether or not the winning rate is UP period) (S1091).

In S1091, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is not a value of "1" to "10" (when the determination in S1091 is NO), that is, the current game is a game within the lottery period. If there is, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1097 described later. In this case, since the processes of S1092 to S1096 described later are not performed, various lottery processes related to the privilege (pseudo BB lottery process, direct addition lottery process, and push order navigation lottery process) are not performed.

On the other hand, in S1091, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is a value of "1" to "10" (when the determination in S1091 is YES), that is, the current game is in the winning rate UP period. In the case of the game in, the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery process (S1092). The pseudo BB lottery process is performed in the same manner as the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 103) described in the above embodiment. However, in the pseudo BB lottery process performed at this time, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB lottery (during AT, when the winning rate UP function is selected) table (see FIG. 135) when the winning rate UP function is activated, and pseudo BB lottery processing is performed. Therefore, in the pseudo BB lottery process of S1092, the winning probability of the pseudo BB game (privilege) is higher than that when the winning rate UP function is not activated.

In addition, when the pseudo BB lottery is won during the operation period of the winning rate UP function (winning the game of BB during AT) and the pseudo BB game is executed as interrupt processing, various benefits performed in the pseudo BB game. In each of the lottery processes (directly added lottery and push order navigation lottery: see FIG. 112), the lottery table when the winning rate UP function is activated is referred to.

Next, the sub CPU 102 directly adds and performs a lottery process (S1093). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the direct addition lottery table (when the winning rate UP function is selected) (see FIG. 139) when the winning rate UP function is activated, and performs the additional lottery processing for the number of AT games. Therefore, the winning probability of the additional game (privilege) and / or the number of additional games that can be acquired in the direct additional lottery process of S1093 is increased as compared with that when the winning rate UP function is not activated. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of additional AT games) of the direct addition lottery process to the number of remaining AT games (S1094).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table when the winning rate UP function (not shown) is activated, and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small winning combination related to the “push order bell” (S1095). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S1096). Then, after the processing of S1096, the sub CPU 102 will be described later.
The process of S1097 is performed.

After the processing of S1096 or when the determination in S1091 is NO, the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the value of the winning rate UP period counter (S1097). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the winning rate UP period counter is “0” (S1098).

In S1098, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is not "0" (when the determination in S1098 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery process when the winning rate UP function is selected during AT. At the same time, the process at the start of the AT-game (see FIG. 144) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S1098, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the winning rate UP period counter is "0" (when the determination in S1098 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the winning rate UP flag (S1099). ). By this process, the operation of the winning rate UP function during the period of the AT game is completed. Then, after the process of S1099, the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery process at the time of selecting the AT-winning rate UP function, and also ends the process at the start of the AT-game (see FIG. 144).

In this example, various processes related to the winning rate UP function are performed as described above, and for example, the following effects can be obtained by this function.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a high-probability state in which a lottery related to privilege grant is given preferential treatment to a player is known, but in such a game machine, a lottery (so-called mode) for shifting to a high-probability state is known. Lottery) is performed to shift the gaming state to a high probability state. Therefore, the gaming state may not shift to the high probability state for a long period of time. In this case, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

However, in the pachislot machine having the winning rate UP function described in the modified example 7, when a specific condition (condition other than the lottery result) is satisfied in the normal game or the AT game, the winning probability of the lottery related to the privilege and / or It is possible to select whether or not to activate the winning rate UP function (whether or not to shift to a high probability state), which increases the amount of benefits that can be acquired, at the player's will. Therefore, in the pachislot of this example, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the winning rate UP function, and it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems that may occur in the past.

In addition, during the operation of the winning rate UP function of this example, a non-lottery period of the privilege (non-winning period of the privilege) is provided, so that the player's spirit of challenge to select the winning rate UP function can be fueled. it can. Further, by providing a non-lottery period of the privilege during the operation period of the winning rate UP function, the player can be happy and unhappy about winning the "rare role" in the period (for example, "for example, during the non-lottery period of the privilege". If the "rare role" wins, the player will be disappointed because he will miss the benefits that he should have obtained). Therefore, in this example, the player's interest in the winning rate UP function can be further enhanced.

In the above-mentioned modification 7, an example in which the above-mentioned winning rate UP function is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 having a game property such that AT lottery is performed at the start of the transition effect game has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. Not done. For example, the winning rate UP function of the above-described modification 7 can be applied to a pachislot machine having a game property such as performing an AT lottery in a normal game. In this case, when the winning rate UP function is started in the normal game, the lottery for various benefits including the AT lottery is not performed during the predetermined number of games (no lottery period), but it is specified after the end of the no lottery period. Over the period of the number of games (winning rate UP period), it is possible to increase (increase) the winning probability of the various benefits and the amount of the benefits that can be obtained in the lottery related to various benefits including the AT lottery.

Further, in the above-mentioned modification 7, the example in which all the benefits are not drawn during the non-lottery period (non-win period of the benefits) of the winning rate UP function has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the winning rate UP function is activated in a normal game, one or two of the pseudo BB lottery, the cycle shortening lottery, and the race victory expectation data UP lottery may not be performed. Further, for example, when the winning rate UP function is activated in the AT game, one or two of the pseudo BB lottery, the additional lottery for the number of AT games, and the push order navigation lottery may not be performed. ..

Further, in the above-described modification 7, an example in which the award is not drawn during the non-lottery period (non-winning period of the award) of the winning rate UP function has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the award is not limited to this. The lottery process is performed. For example, the lottery value (coefficient) of the lottery table used for the lottery may be set to 0, and the lottery process may be performed so that the privilege is not won. In addition, during the non-lottery period of the winning rate UP function, the privilege lottery may not be performed only when the internal winning combination is a part of the internal winning combination (in other words, the non-lottery period of the winning rate UP function). In the case where the internal winning combination is a part of the internal winning combination (for example, a fixed combination), the privilege may be drawn. Further, in the above-mentioned modification 7, the case where the winning probability of the privilege and / or the amount of the privilege that can be obtained is 0 in the non-lottery period of the winning rate UP function has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning is not limited to this. In the lottery period of the rate UP function, the lottery process is performed so that the winning probability of the award and / or the amount of the award that can be obtained becomes smaller (decreased) than when the winning rate UP function is not selected. You may.

Further, in the above-described modification 7, an example in which the conditions for generating the selection effect of the winning rate UP function (conditions for starting the operation of the winning rate UP function) are defined by the number of remaining games has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of digested games, the execution time of the game, the number of "missing" wins, the lottery, the winning of a predetermined internal winning combination, and the conditions for generating the selection effect of the winning rate UP function (winning rate). The configuration may be configured to specify the operation start condition of the UP function).

[Modification 8]
(1) Outline of AT Number Management Function In the above-described embodiment, when the number of remaining AT games is not greater than 0 in the AT game state, that is, when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 or less and the AT game state ends. If the net increase number is equal to or more than a predetermined number, it is determined to start the next AT game state (see FIG. 114).

However, in the game machine according to the present invention, the end condition of the AT game state is defined by the number of AT end payouts, and the number of games (the number of games) is equal to or more than the predetermined number of games before the end of the AT game state. In some cases, it may be decided to start the next AT game state.

In the modified example 8, a configuration example in which the operation period of the AT game is managed by the net increase number of medals (AT number management function) is applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment. In this example, during the AT operation period, the difference number at the time of winning the main small winning combination (“pushing order bell (CT bell)”) is cumulatively added, and the sum of the cumulatively added difference number is a predetermined number (described later). An example will be described in which the AT game state ends when the number of AT end payouts = AT end basic payout number + additional AT number) or more.

Further, in this example, an example in which the total sum (net increase number) of the difference number of medals is updated when the push order navigation lottery of the main small winning combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”) is won will be described. In this example, when the pseudo BB game is won during the AT game period, the difference number of medals obtained during the pseudo BB game is the above-mentioned predetermined number (AT described later) that triggers the end of the AT game state. It shall not be counted in the net increase in the number of medals compared with the number of medals paid out at the end.

In addition, the basic AT end payout number determined in the AT preparation game changes according to the type of the ally character who wins in the race production. Therefore, in this example, the lower limit of the number of medals to be paid out at the end of the medal (hereinafter referred to as "the number of medals to be paid out at the end of AT") that defines the end trigger of the operation period of the AT game, that is, the minimum guarantee for the operation period of one AT game The net increase in the number of medals to be made (initial net increase) also changes depending on the type of ally character. Further, in this example, when a direct addition lottery is won in, for example, an AT game, the number of additional medals won (the number of additional ATs described later) is added to the number of medals paid out at the end of AT.

(2) Various lottery tables Next, in this example, see FIGS. 146 and 147 for an example of various lottery tables that are changed when the management method of the AT operation period is changed from the management of the number of games to the management of the number of medals. I will explain. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of a direct addition lottery table (AT addition number) used in the direct addition lottery processing. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a kappa AT acquisition number lottery table used when determining the AT end basic payout number at the time of a kappa victory.

In this example, the lottery table for determining the number of AT games used in the above embodiment is replaced with the lottery table for determining the number of medals acquired during the AT game period as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147. As the various tables described above, the various tables described in the above embodiments can be used.

As shown in FIG. 146, the direct addition lottery table (AT addition number) of this example is referred to as the number of medals that can be added in the AT game (hereinafter referred to as "addition AT number") for each internal winning combination or its winning history data. ) And the lottery value. In this example, the number of additional ATs for medals is "0" (no addition), "30", "60", "100", "150", "250", "400", "600", and "600". 900 "is provided.

In the direct addition lottery process using the direct addition lottery table (the number of AT additions) in this example, for example, when the winning history data is "3 lost", there is a probability of 32736/32768 to add 60 medals. The number of ATs is won, and the number of additional ATs with 250 medals with a probability of 32/32768 is won. That is, also in this example, when the pseudo BB game is started during the AT game, even if the internal winning combination "loss" is continuously won in the pseudo BB game state, the privilege of adding the number of medals won in the AT game is added. May be obtained. Then, the number of additional ATs won in the direct addition lottery process of this example is added to the number of AT end payouts of medals that specify the end trigger of the operation period of the AT game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 147, the Kappa AT acquisition number lottery table of this example shows the number of AT acquisitions at the time of Kappa victory for each Kappa sushi MAP data (“1 (squid)” to “8 (Ise lobster)”). The correspondence between (the number of medals obtained when the video production of eating the corresponding sushi material by "Kappa" is performed) and the lottery value is specified. In this example, "30", "60", "100", "150", "400", "600", and "900" are provided as the number of ATs for the medal when the kappa wins. Further, in the Kappa AT acquisition number lottery table, a lottery value of "LIFE up" is also defined for each Kappa Sushi MAP data ("1" to "8") as in the above embodiment.

In the lottery process using the Kappa AT acquisition number lottery table in this example, for example, the set Kappa sushi MAP data is "1" (squid), and the video production of "Kappa" eating the sushi material "squid" is liquid crystal. When displayed on the display device 11, the number of ATs of 30 medals won is won with a probability of 32672/32768, and the number of ATs of 900 medals with a probability of 96/32768 is won. Further, for example, when the set Kappa sushi MAP data is "3" (Kappa roll) and the image effect of "Kappa" eating the sushi material "Kappa roll" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, AT. You won't win the number of cards you get, but you will definitely win the "LIFE Up".

Further, in the lottery process using the Kappa AT acquisition number lottery table in this example, for example, the set Kappa sushi MAP data is "8" (Ise lobster), and "Kappa" eats the sushi material "Ise lobster". When the video effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the AT acquisition number of 150 medals has a probability of 27854/32768, and the AT acquisition of 400 medals, 600 medals or 900 medals has a probability of 1638/32768. The number of sheets wins. That is, even in the Kappa Sushi production of this example, if the production of "Kappa" eating sushi material of high-quality ingredients is performed, the number of ATs of a larger medal is won.

Then, in this example, in the Kappa Sushi production, the total number of AT acquisitions acquired is the AT end basic payout number of medals (basic number of AT end payouts).

(3) Various related processes of the AT number management function Next, various processing examples related to the execution of the function of managing the above-mentioned AT game period by the net increase number of medals (AT number management function) will be specifically described. The execution processing of these functions is controlled by the sub-control circuit 101, but the other processing is executed in the same manner as in the above embodiment. Therefore, here, various processes related to the execution of these functions (variable setting process, AT preparation _ variable setting process, race _ game start process, kappa victory _ game start process, AT _ game) Only the start processing and the BB_game start processing during AT) will be described, and the description of various other processes will be omitted.

(3-1) Variable Setting Process First, the variable setting process in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 148. The variable setting process of this example is also performed in S341 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the process at the time of receiving the start command, similarly to the above embodiment.

When the variable processing of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processing of S1101 to S1112 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 148. The processing of S1101 to S1112 in the variable setting processing of this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S361 to S372 in the flowchart of the variable setting processing of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1101 to S1112 will be omitted here.

After processing S1108, S1110 or S1112, or when S1111 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 initializes the "AT directly added number" (S1113). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets "0" to the number of additional ATs of medals.

Then, after the processing of S1113, the sub CPU 102 ends the variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S342 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

(3-2) AT Preparing_Variable Setting Process Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the AT preparing_variable setting process performed in S1106 in the flowchart of the variable setting process in this example (see FIG. 148) will be described. ..

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“AT preparing”) (S1121).

In S1121, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S1121 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation _ variable setting process and processes it. Is moved to S1107 of the variable setting process (see FIG. 148). On the other hand, in S1121, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is different from the game state (next time) (when the determination in S1121 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the "race victory flag" and the "race runner map". , "Race Win Rate Map", "Race Consecutive Loss Counter" and "AT Game Count Counter" (S1122).

The "race victory flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the set "race winner" (race winner (candidate)) wins in the race production, and when the "race winner" wins the race, , "1" is set in the "race victory flag". Further, the "race consecutive loss counter" is a counter that manages the number of times that the set "race winner" is continuously defeated in the race production (the number of times that the AT is not won in succession). In the present embodiment, if the "race winner" loses in the race production 10 times in a row (at the ceiling), the AT win will be awarded.

Then, after the processing of S1122, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparing_variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S1107 of the variable setting processing (see FIG. 148).

(3-3) Process at the start of the race during the race Next, the process at the start of the game during the race in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 150. The process at the start of the race in this example is also performed in S349 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the process at the time of receiving the start command, as in the above embodiment.

When the during-race_game start process of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processes of S1151 to S1162 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 150. The processing of S1151 to S1162 in the processing at the start of the race in this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S641 to S653 in the flowchart of the processing at the start of the race in the above embodiment shown in FIG. 111. .. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1151 to S1164 will be omitted here.

In S1164, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S1164 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1167 described later.

On the other hand, in S1164, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S1164 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is the example of this example shown in FIG. With reference to the direct addition lottery table (AT addition number), the addition lottery processing (direct addition lottery processing) of the number of medals acquired in the AT game is performed based on the "winning combination history" (S1165). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (additional AT number) of the direct addition lottery process to the AT end payout number (S1166).

After the processing of S1066 or when the determination in S1164 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs the push order navigation lottery process of the small winning combination related to the "push order bell" (S1167). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S1168). Then, after the processing of S1168, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the start of the race during the race of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 87).

(3-4) Kappa Victory _ Game Start Process Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the Kappa Victory _ game start process in this example will be described. In addition, the kappa victory time_game start time processing of this example is also performed in S670 in the flowchart (see FIG. 112) of AT preparation _game start time processing, as in the above embodiment.

When the Kappa Victory_Game Start process of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processes of S1171 to S1185 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 151. The processing of S1171 to S1185 in the kappa winning _ game start processing of this example is the same as the processing of S681 to S695 in the flowchart of the kappa winning _ game starting processing of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 113. Will be done. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1171 to S1185 will be omitted here.

In S1181, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is the “group 1 combination” (when the determination in S1181 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the Kappa AT acquisition number lottery table of this example shown in FIG. 147. Then, based on the Kappa Sushi MAP data (sushi material), the number of ATs to be acquired is determined by lottery (S1186). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined AT acquisition number to the currently acquired AT acquisition number (S1187).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sushi material at the time of winning the number of ATs acquired is any of "squid", "salmon", and "tuna" (Kappa Sushi MAP data is "1", "4", and " Whether or not it is any of 6 ”) is determined (S1188). In S1188, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi material is not any of "squid", "salmon", and "tuna" (when the determination in S1188 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1190 described later.

On the other hand, in S1188, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi material is any of "squid", "salmon", and "tuna" (when the determination in S1188 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the value of the kappa end counter. Is subtracted by "1" (S1189).

After the processing of S1189 or when the determination in S1188 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the kappa end counter is less than "0" (S1190).

In S1190, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the kappa end counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S1190 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT acquisitions after the addition calculation of S1187 as the AT end basic payout number. (S1191). Then, after the processing of S1191, the sub CPU 701 ends the processing at the time of winning the kappa_game, and shifts the processing to S675 of the processing at the time of AT preparation_game start (see FIG. 112).

On the other hand, in S1190, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the kappa end counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S1190 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag (S1192). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "20 times" in the "BET return chance" (S1193).

By the processing of this S1193, as a revival lottery of the game for determining the basic payout number at the end of AT, which is performed at the end of the processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start, it is possible to draw by pressing the BET button 20 times (recovery of repeated hits). Become. If the revival lottery by pressing the BET button 20 times is won, the process of winning the kappa in this example and starting the game is performed again.

Then, after the processing of S1193, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of winning the kappa_game start in this example, and shifts the processing to S675 of the processing at the time of AT preparation_game start (see FIG. 112).

Although not shown in FIG. 151, when the sushi material is "Kappa roll" (when the Kappa sushi MAP data is "3") in the lottery process of the number of ATs acquired in S1186, "LIFE up" is displayed. Win. In this case, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the kappa end counter instead of a series of processes from the process of adding the number of AT acquisitions (S1187) to the process of subtracting the kappa end counter (S1189). Will be done.

(3-5) During AT_Game Start Process Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the AT during AT_game start process in this example will be described. Note that the AT-game start processing of this example is also performed in S353 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the start command reception processing, as in the above embodiment.

When the AT-game start processing of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first adds "1" to the AT game number counter (S1201). As a result, the number of games digested in the AT game state is counted.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) and the gaming state (previous) is "AT preparing" (S1202). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1202 that the determination condition of S1202 is not satisfied (when the determination in S1202 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1208 described later.

On the other hand, in S1202, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1202 is satisfied (when the determination in S1202 is YES), that is, when the current game is the start game of the AT game, the sub CPU 102 draws the winning target person. With reference to the table (see FIG. 35), a lottery process for race winners (candidates) is performed (S1203). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target person lottery process to the "race winner" (S1204).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the post-AT race win expectation data selection lottery table (see FIG. 42), and performs a race win rate lottery process (post-AT race win rate lottery process) performed in the transition effect game after the end of AT. (S1205). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the post-AT race win rate lottery process of S1205 in the race win rate data (S1206).

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the AT end basic payout number to the AT end payout number counter (S1207). The AT end payout number counter shows a specific example of the remaining net increase payout number management means according to the present invention.

After the processing of S1207 or when the determination in S1202 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing described with reference to FIG. 106 (S1208).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the direct addition lottery table (AT addition number) of this example shown in FIG. 146, and performs a medal addition lottery process (direct addition lottery process) (S1209). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of medals added AT) of the direct addition lottery process to the current AT end payout number counter (S1210).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small winning combination related to the “push order bell” (S1211). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S1212).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the main small combination (“pushing order bell (CT bell)”) and the pushing order navigation lottery process is won (S1213).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1213 that the determination condition of S1213 is not satisfied (when the determination in S1213 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of AT_game start in this example, and receives a start command for the process. Move to S356 of time processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S1213, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1213 is satisfied (when the determination in S1213 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the AT game period (the sum of the differences). ) Is updated (S1214). In this update process, the sub CPU 102 net increases the difference number of medals (payout number-multiplied number) obtained at the time of winning the main small role ("pushing order bell (CT bell)") won in the current game. Add to the number of sheets. The renewal process of the net increase number of medals (sum of the difference number) shows a specific example of the payout number counting means according to the present invention.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the net increase in the number of updated medals is equal to or greater than the number of medals paid out at the end of AT (S1215). By the process of S1215, it is determined whether or not the AT game is continued in the next game. Therefore, the process of S1215 shows a second example of the notification game ending means according to the present invention.

In S1215, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the net increase in the number of updated medals is not equal to or greater than the AT end payout number (when the determination in S1215 is NO), that is, when the AT game is continued in the next game, the sub CPU 102 , The game state (current) is set to the game state (next time) (S1216). Then, after the processing of S1216, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-game start processing of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S1215, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the net increase number of medals after the update is equal to or greater than the AT end payout number (when the determination in S1215 is YES), that is, when the AT game ends in the current game, the sub The CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the specified number of games corresponding to the number of AT end payouts used as the end condition of the current AT game state is equal to or greater than the value of the AT game number counter (S1217).

In S1217, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the specified number of games corresponding to the number of AT end payouts is equal to or greater than the value of the AT game number counter (when the determination in S1217 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the race win rate to 100. Rewrite to% (S1218).

After the processing of S1218 or when the determination in S1217 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets "during racing" in the gaming state (next time) (S1219). Then, after the processing of S1219, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-game start processing of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

(3-6) Processing at the start of BB_game during AT Next, the processing at the start of BB_game during AT in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 153. The AT-in-AT BB_game start processing of this example is also performed in S355 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the start command reception processing, as in the above embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 108 (S1221). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 109 (S1222). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB counter management process described with reference to FIG. 110 (S1223).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the direct addition lottery table (AT addition number) of this example shown in FIG. 146, and performs a medal addition lottery process (direct addition lottery process) (S1224). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of medals added AT) of the direct addition lottery process to the number of AT end payouts (S1225).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small winning combination related to the “push order bell” (S1226). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S1227). Then, after the processing of S1227, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game start processing during AT of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

In this example, various related processes of the AT number management function are performed as described above. Then, for example, the following effects can be obtained by these functions.

In the modified example 8, when the specified number of games corresponding to the number of AT end payouts is equal to or greater than the number of games consumed during the AT game period, the race win rate is rewritten to 100% (see S1118 in FIG. 152). That is, during the AT game period, it is easier to rewrite the race win rate to 100% if the main small role (“push order bell (CT bell)”) is frequently won and the push order navigation lottery process is won. ..

As a result, it is accepted that it is preferable for the player to pay out medals during the AT game period. As a result, even if medals are paid out frequently during the T-game period, the interest of the game can be prevented from being lowered.

Further, for example, the MB (middle bonus) may be won during the AT game period so that medals equal to or greater than the number of medals paid out by winning a small winning combination related to the bell may be paid out. .. Even in this case, since it is accepted as preferable for the player to pay out medals during the AT game period, it is possible to prevent the game from being deteriorating. Further, in the MB during the AT game period, a small winning combination that is unlikely to be stopped and displayed during normal times (during non-MB) may be configured to be stopped and displayed. Then, a game property may be added that makes it easier to determine the addition of the number of AT games (AT payout number) when the small winning combination, which is unlikely to be stopped and displayed during normal times (non-MB), is stopped and displayed. ..

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 11 may display the number of end target games obtained by subtracting the number of games consumed in the AT game period from the specified number of games. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the conditions under which the transition to the next AT gaming state is determined. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the AT game period. In addition, a plurality of specified numbers of games according to this embodiment may be provided. Further, the specified number of games may be determined for each set of AT games, or may be determined at the start of AT games. Further, the specified number of games may be determined according to the number of basic payouts at the end of AT.

Further, in this example, when the transition to the next AT gaming state is decided, the transition to the AT gaming state is notified to the player through the race. However, the gaming machine according to this example is configured to start the next AT gaming state without going through the race (after the end of the AT gaming state) when the transition to the next AT gaming state is decided. May be good.

[Modification 9]
(1) Outline of AT number management function and AT game end trigger change function In Pachislot 1 of the above embodiment, the number of digested games during the operation period of the AT game is counted, and the number of AT games is specified (the number of AT start games). (+ Number of additional AT games) The configuration in which the AT game state ends when the AT game is digested, that is, the configuration in which the operation period of the AT game is managed by the number of digested games (game number management) has been described. Not limited.

The management of the AT game may be configured so that the player can select either the AT game number management function or the AT number management function. In the above-mentioned number management, the total number of medals (net increase) obtained by subtracting the number of medals acquired (paid out) during the operation period of the AT game is counted, and the net increase of medals is specified. When the number of medals is reached, the AT game state ends. That is, the operation period of the AT game is managed by the net increase in the number of medals.

In the modified example 9, in the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment, a configuration in which the operation period of the AT game is managed by the net increase in the number of medals (AT number management function) and a configuration in which the operation period is managed by the number of digested games (AT game number management function) are provided. An example of configuration when applied will be described. In the AT number management, during the AT operation period, the difference number at the time of winning the main small winning combination (“pushing order bell (CT bell)”) is cumulatively added, and the sum of the cumulatively added difference number is a predetermined number (described later). The AT game state ends when the number of AT end payouts = AT end basic payout number + additional AT number) or more.

Further, in this example, an example in which the total sum (net increase number) of the difference number of medals is updated when the push order navigation lottery of the main small winning combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”) is won will be described. In this example, when the pseudo BB game is won during the AT game period, the difference number of medals obtained during the pseudo BB game is the above-mentioned predetermined number (AT described later) that triggers the end of the AT game state. It shall not be counted in the net increase in the number of medals compared with the number of medals paid out at the end.

Further, in the modification 9, a configuration is adopted in which the number of AT start games is determined in the AT preparation game. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have a configuration in which the basic payout number for AT termination is determined in the AT preparation game. That is, the value related to the end trigger determined before starting the AT game may be the number of AT start games or the basic payout number of AT ends. Further, the operation control of the AT game number management function and the AT number management function is executed by the sub-control circuit 101.

(2) Various related processes of the AT game end trigger change function Next, various processing examples related to the execution of the AT game end trigger change function will be specifically described. The execution process of the change function of the AT game end trigger is controlled by the sub-control circuit 101, but the other processes are executed in the same manner as in the above embodiment. Therefore, here, various processes related to the execution of these functions (effect content determination process, input state command reception process, AT _ game start process, AT end payout number management process, and remaining AT game). Only the process during numerical management) will be described, and the description of other various processes will be omitted.

(2-1) Effect content determination process First, the effect content determination process in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 154. The effect content determination process of this example is also performed in S281 in the flowchart of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83), as in the above embodiment.

When the effect content determination process of this example is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the processes of S1251 to S1267 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 154. The processes of S1251 to S1267 in the effect content determination process of this example are performed in the same manner as the processes of S291 to S307 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 84. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1251 to S1267 will be omitted here.

In S1267, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the input state command is being received (when the determination in S1267 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the input state command reception processing (S1268). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of receiving the input state command based on, for example, the on-edge state / off-edge state information of each operation unit included in the input state command. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command will be described with reference to FIG. 155 described later. Then, after the process of S1118, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S282 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83).

(2-2) Input Status Command Reception Processing Next, the input status command reception processing in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 155.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input state command includes a display instruction on the AT end condition selection screen (S1281).

In S1281, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display instruction of the AT end condition selection screen is included (when the determination in S1281 is YES), the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the AT end condition selection screen. (S1282). When the AT end condition selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the player can select the AT end condition using a predetermined operation unit. Then, after the processing of S1282, the sub CPU 102 ends the input state command reception processing and the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 154), and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S1281, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display instruction of the AT end condition selection screen is not included (when the determination in S1281 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sends the input status command to the remaining AT as the AT end condition. It is determined whether or not the instruction for selecting the number of games is included (S1283).

In S1283, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the instruction for selecting the number of remaining AT games is included as the AT end condition (when the determination in S1283 is YES), the sub CPU 102 pays out the current AT end condition as the AT end. It is determined whether or not the number is the number (S1284).

In S1284, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current AT end condition is not the number of AT end payouts (when the determination in S1284 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an input state command reception process and an effect content determination process (see FIG. 154). ) Is terminated, and the process is transferred to S282 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83). If the current AT end condition is not the number of AT end payouts, the current AT end condition is the number of remaining AT games. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 maintains a state in which the number of remaining AT games is selected as the AT end condition.

On the other hand, in S1284, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current AT end condition is the number of AT end payouts (when the determination in S1284 is YES), the sub CPU 102 converts the number of AT end payouts into the number of remaining AT games. (S1285). This process of S1285 shows a first example of the notification game end trigger conversion means according to the present invention.

In the present embodiment, the number of AT end payouts is converted into the number of remaining AT games by dividing the number of AT end payouts by the conversion coefficient y (for example, "3"). In addition, when converting the number of AT end payouts to the number of remaining AT games, if there is a remainder that cannot be divided, the decimal point or less is rounded down or rounded off.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of remaining AT games obtained in S1285 in the counter for the number of remaining AT games, and clears the AT end payout number counter (S1286). The remaining AT game number counter shows a specific example of the remaining game number management means according to the present invention. Further, the process of S1286 shows a first example of the termination trigger determining means according to the present invention.
After the processing of S1286, the sub CPU 102 ends the input state command reception processing and the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 154), and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

In S1283, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the instruction for selecting the number of remaining AT games is not included as the AT end condition (when the determination in S1283 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the AT end payout number as the AT end condition. It is determined whether or not the instruction to be selected is included (S1287).

In S1287, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT end condition includes an instruction to select the number of AT end payouts (when the determination in S1287 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the current AT end condition remaining in the AT game. It is determined whether or not it is a number (S1288).

In S1288, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current AT end condition is not the number of remaining AT games (when the determination in S1288 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an input state command reception process and an effect content determination process (see FIG. 154). ) Is terminated, and the process is transferred to S282 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 83). If the current AT end condition is not the number of remaining AT games, the current AT end condition is the number of AT end payouts. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 maintains a state in which the AT end payout number is selected as the AT end condition.

On the other hand, in S1288, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current AT end condition is the number of remaining AT games (when the determination in S1288 is YES), the sub CPU 102 converts the number of remaining AT games into the number of AT end payouts. (S1289). This process of S1289 shows a second example of the notification game end trigger conversion means according to the present invention.
In the present embodiment, the number of remaining AT games is converted into the number of AT-end payouts by multiplying the number of AT-end payouts by the conversion coefficient y (for example, "3").

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the AT end payout number counter obtained in S1189 in the AT end payout number counter, and clears the remaining AT game number counter (S1290). This process of S1290 shows a second example of the termination trigger determining means according to the present invention.
After the processing of S1290, the sub CPU 102 ends the input state command reception processing and the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 154), and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

In S1287, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the instruction for selecting the AT end payout number is not included as the AT end condition (when the determination in S1287 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in the on-edge state / off-edge state of each operation unit. The production is determined based on (S1291). After the processing of S1291, the sub CPU 102 ends the input state command reception processing and the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 154), and shifts the processing to S282 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 83).

(2-3) During AT_Game start processing Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the AT during AT_game start processing in this example will be described. Note that the AT-game start processing of this example is also performed in S353 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the start command reception processing, as in the above embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current AT end condition is the number of AT end payouts (S1301). In S1301, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current AT end condition is the AT end payout number (YES in S1301), the sub CPU 102 performs the AT end payout number management process (S1302). The details of the process of managing the number of sheets to be paid out at the end of AT will be described with reference to FIG. 157 described later. After the processing of S1302, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-game start processing of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S1301, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current AT end condition is not the number of AT end payouts (when the determination in S1301 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of managing the number of remaining AT games (S1303). The details of the processing during management of the number of remaining AT games will be described with reference to FIG. 158 described later. After the processing of S1303, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-game start processing of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

(2-4) Processing during AT end payout number management Next, the process during AT end payout number management in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 157.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game state (current) is different from the game state (previous time) and the game state (previous time) is "AT preparing" (S1311). In S1311, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1311 is not satisfied (NO determination in S1311), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1317 described later.

On the other hand, in S1311, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1311 is satisfied (when the determination in S1311 is YES), that is, when the current game is the start game of the AT game, the sub CPU 102 draws the winning target person. With reference to the table (see FIG. 35), the lottery process of the race winner (candidate) is performed (S1312). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target person lottery process to the “race winner” (S1313).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the post-AT race win expectation data selection lottery table (see FIG. 42), and performs a race win rate lottery process (post-AT race win rate lottery process) performed in the transition effect game after the end of AT. (S1314). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the post-AT race win rate lottery process in S1314 in the race win rate data (S1315).

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the AT end basic payout number to the AT end payout number counter (S1316).

After the processing of S1316 or when the determination in S1311 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing described with reference to FIG. 106 (S1317).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the direct addition lottery table (see, for example, FIG. 154), and performs the medal addition lottery process (direct addition lottery process) (S1318). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of medals added AT) of the direct addition lottery process to the current AT end payout number counter (S1319).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small winning combination related to the “push order bell” (S1320). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S1321).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the main small combination (“pushing order bell (CT bell)”) and the pushing order navigation lottery process is won (S1322).

In S1322, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1062 is not satisfied (when the determination in S1322 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the AT end payout number management process and the AT _ game start time process in this example. It ends and moves the process to S356 of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S1322, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1322 is satisfied (when the determination in S1322 is YES), the sub CPU 102 net increases the medals paid out during the AT game period from the AT end payout number counter. The number of sheets (total of the difference number of sheets) is subtracted (S1323).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the AT end payout number counter is "0" or less (S1324). By the process of S1324, it is determined whether or not the AT game is continued in the next game. Therefore, the process of S1324 shows a third example of the notification game ending means according to the present invention.

In S1324, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the AT end payout number counter is not "0" or less (when the determination in S1324 is NO), that is, when the AT game is continued in the next game, the sub CPU 102 determines. The game state (current) is set to the game state (next time) (S1325). Then, after the processing of S1325, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT end payout number management processing and the AT-game start processing of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in S1324, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the AT end payout number counter is "0" or less (when the determination in S1324 is YES), that is, when the AT game ends in the current game, the sub CPU 102 Sets "during the race" in the game state (next time) (S1326). Then, after the processing of S1326, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT end payout number management processing and the AT-game start processing of this example, and shifts the processing to S356 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 87).

(2-5) Processing during management of the number of remaining AT games Next, processing during management of the number of remaining AT games in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 158.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (S1331).

In S1331, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S1331 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1333 described later. On the other hand, in S1331, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (when the determination in S1331 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of remaining AT games (S1332).

After the processing of S1332 or when S1331 is NO determination, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) and the gaming state (previous) is "AT preparing". (S1333). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1333 that the determination condition of S1333 is not satisfied (when the determination in S1333 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1338 described later.

On the other hand, in S1333, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1333 is satisfied (when the determination in S1333 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the winner lottery table (see FIG. 35) and is the race winner target (see FIG. 35). The lottery process of the candidate) person is performed (S1334). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target person lottery process to the "race winner" (S1335).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the post-AT race win expectation data selection lottery table (see FIG. 42), and performs a race win rate lottery process (post-AT race win rate lottery process) performed in the transition effect game after AT (see FIG. 42). S1336). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the post-AT race win rate lottery process in S1336 in the race win rate data (S1337).

After the processing of S1337 or when the determination in S1333 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing described with reference to FIG. 106 (S1338). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the direct addition lottery table (see FIG. 49), and performs an additional lottery process for the number of AT games (directly added lottery process) (S1339). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of additional AT games) of the direct addition lottery process to the number of remaining AT games (S1340).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small winning combination related to the “push order bell” (S1341). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S1342).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (S1343). By the process of S1343, it is determined whether or not the AT game is continued in the next game. Therefore, the process of S1343 shows a fourth example of the notification game ending means according to the present invention.

In S1343, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (when the determination in S1343 is YES), that is, when the AT game is continued in the next game, the sub CPU 102 is in the game state (when the AT game is continued). The game state (current) is set to (next time) (S1344). Then, after the process of S1344, the sub CPU 102 ends the process of managing the number of remaining AT games and the process of starting the game during AT in this example, and shifts the process to S356 of the process when the start command is received (see FIG. 87).

In S1343, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S1343 is NO), that is, when the AT game is terminated in the current game, the sub CPU 102 is in the game state (when the AT game is terminated). Next time) is set to "during the race" (S1345). Then, after the processing of S1345, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the start of the AT during the game, and shifts the processing to S356 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 87).

In the modification 9, the player can change the end condition of the AT game state at an arbitrary timing. As a result, the player can select the game content, and the interest of the game in the AT game state can be enhanced.

For example, when the end condition of the AT game state is the number of AT end payouts, if the main small winning combination (“pushing order bell (CT bell)”) is frequently determined as the internal winning combination, the ending of the AT gaming state is terminated. Since it is accelerated, the opportunity to add the number of ATs is lost. Further, when the end condition of the AT game state is the number of remaining AT games, the more frequently the main small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the more medals are acquired, which is in the interest of the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which the winning ratio of the main small winning combination in the AT gaming state is predicted and the end condition of the AT gaming state is switched.

Further, in this example, the remaining number of games or the remaining number of payouts under the selected end condition may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the remaining number of games or the remaining number of payouts when the end condition is switched to the one that is not selected may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. As a result, it is possible to notify the information useful when the player decides whether or not to switch the end condition, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the AT game state.

Further, in this example, when converting the AT end payout number to the remaining AT game number, if the AT end payout number is not divisible by the conversion coefficient y and there is a remainder, the minority points or less are rounded down or rounded off. .. However, as the game machine according to this example, the AT end condition selection screen is displayed only when the AT end payout number is divisible by the conversion coefficient y, and the AT end payout number can be converted into the remaining AT game number. Good.

Further, in the AT number management function of the above-mentioned modified example, only the difference number at the time of winning the main small winning combination (“pushing order bell (CT bell)”) is counted as the net increase number of medals. The invention is not limited to this, and the difference in the number of medals obtained when a small winning combination other than the main small winning combination wins may be cumulatively added to the net increase in the number of medals. Further, in the AT number management function of the modified example described above, an example of updating the net increase number of medals in the AT game period at the time of winning the push order navigation lottery of the main small winning combination (“push order bell (CT bell)”) will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the net increase in the number of medals may be updated when the main small winning combination is won or when the main small winning combination is won.

Furthermore, in the AT number management function of the above-mentioned modified example, the net increase in the number of medals is updated when a combination other than the main small combination ("pushing order bell (CT bell)") (including "loss") is won. It may be configured to be. In such a configuration, for example, when the winning combination is "missing" or the number of payouts is smaller than the number of BETs (multiplied number), the winning combination has already been acquired in the update process of the net increase number of medals. The net increase number of sheets may be reduced (the difference number of negative values is added to the currently acquired net increase number).

Further, in the AT number management function of the above-described modification, an example of managing the operation period of the AT game based on the net increase number of medals has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of medals to be paid out. The operation period of the AT game may be managed based on the total number of (value not subtracted by the number of multiplied cards).

Further, the AT number management function of the above-described modification can also be applied to a pachislot machine having an ART function in which the AT function and the RT function can be generated at the same time.

In the above-described embodiment and various modifications, for example, a lottery process (for example, an internal lottery process) and a control process related to the progress of the game are performed in the main control circuit, and a lottery process (for example, an AT lottery process) related to the effect control is performed. ) And an example in which the control process is performed by the sub-control circuit have been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a part or all of various lottery processes and various control processes performed in the sub control circuit in the above-described embodiment and various modifications may be performed in the main control circuit. Then, the determined internal winning combination, the push order related to the determined internal winning combination, and the like may be notified by an instruction monitor (display device managed by the main control circuit). Further, for example, a part or all of various lottery processes and various control processes performed in the main control circuit in the above embodiment and various modifications may be performed in the sub control circuit.

<Summary>
[Change function of AT game end trigger]
Conventionally, it is known that a player can select a desired effect from a plurality of types of effects provided in advance (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-187179). In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-187179, when one of a plurality of effects is selected by the player, control is performed to execute (output) the selected effect.

However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-187179 merely executes the effect selected by the player, and does not change the game content.

The present invention has been made in order to meet the above demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a player can select a game content.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, the player can change the end condition of the AT gaming state at an arbitrary timing. As a result, the player can select the game content, and the interest of the game in the AT game state can be enhanced.

[Determining function of next AT game]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above configuration, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") has been developed. Then, when the total number of net increases (number of payouts-number of multiplications) of the game media reaches a predetermined value (number of ends), a game machine that terminates AT is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155664). ).

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155664, when the combination of symbols related to the payout of the gaming medium is frequently stopped and displayed during AT, the total number of net increases in the gaming medium is reduced with a small number of games. Since the predetermined value is reached, the AT ends promptly. On the other hand, as a game having an AT function, there is a game in which a lottery is performed in order to obtain a privilege advantageous to the player at each game during the AT or at a specific period.

As a lottery for obtaining a privilege advantageous to the player, for example, a lottery of "additional number of acquisitions" to increase a predetermined value defined as the number of ends, and a "set" to start the next AT after the end of the current AT. The lottery of "additional number" can be mentioned. Therefore, if the AT ends promptly, the chances of obtaining advantageous benefits for the player such as "additional number of acquired sheets" and "additional number of sets" will be reduced. Therefore, the player was not obediently pleased that the payout of the game medium occurred frequently during the AT.

The present invention has been made in order to meet the above demands, and an object of the present invention is that the game media are frequently paid out during AT, which ends when the total number of net increases of the game media reaches a predetermined value. Also, it is to provide a game machine capable of not deteriorating the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined that the net increase in the number of medals paid out during the AT game period (the total number of medals) is equal to or greater than the specified number, the race win rate is rewritten to 100% (see S728 in FIG. 114). .. That is, the operation of the next AT is determined. As a result, it is accepted that it is preferable for the player to pay out medals during the AT game period. As a result, even if medals are paid out frequently during the AT game period, the interest of the game can be prevented from being lowered.

[AT lottery function according to the number of medals won]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above configuration, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") has been developed (for example, JP-A-2014-155664). In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-155664, a lottery based on the internal winning combination is performed to determine whether or not to start AT.

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155664, since it is drawn for each game whether or not the start of AT is determined, the process of determining the start of AT is simple, and the interest of the game is There was a problem that

The present invention has been made in order to meet the above demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of complicating the process of determining the start of AT and enhancing the interest of the game. Is.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, the number of medals paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed during each cycle of the non-AT state is measured by the bell payout number counter during the cycle. Count. Then, with reference to the race result lottery table according to the value of the bell payout number counter during the cycle, it is determined by lottery whether or not the race result is a win (AT win). As a result, the probability that the start of AT is determined depends on the number of medals paid out based on the small winning combination of the bell. As a result, the process of determining the start of AT can be complicated and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 11 ... Liquid crystal display device, 19L … Left stop button, 19C… Middle stop button, 19R… Right stop button, 21… Medal slot, 51… Hopper device, 55… Main control board case, 57… Sub control board case, 71… Main control board, 72… Sub-control board, 91 ... Main control circuit, 93 ... Main CPU, 101 ... Sub-control circuit, 102 ... Sub CPU

Claims (3)

A storage game value updating means for updating the value of the stored game value, which is the game value deposited in the game machine body, and
A max betting means that allows a bet on a unit game to bet on the maximum value of the game value that can be bet on the unit game in order to start the game from the stored game value.
After betting the game value for a unit game , the winning combination determining means for determining the winning combination, and
A variable display control means for stopping the variable display of a plurality of symbols according to the determination result of the winning combination determining means is provided.
The winning combination determining means can determine a special combination whose determination result is carried over until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed.
If the value of the stored game value is greater than 0 in the period for accepting a bet for starting a unit game in a situation where the special role has been carried over as a result of the determination, the value of the stored game value and the unit already When the total with the value of the game value bet on the game is a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value , the game value is bet on the unit game even if the max bet means is operated. A game machine characterized by not having. The winning combination determining means can determine the special combination when the number of bets on the game value for the unit game is the predetermined value, and the number of bets on the game value for the unit game is the maximum value . In some cases, the special role cannot be determined,
When the number of bets of the game value for the unit game is the predetermined value, it is possible to display the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination and win the special combination, and the game value for the unit game The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the number of bets is the maximum value , it is impossible to display the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination and win the special combination. .. The winning combination determining means can determine a specific combination when the number of bets on the game value for a unit game is the maximum value , and the number of bets on the game value for the unit game is the predetermined value. It is not possible to determine the specific role
The specific combination is a combination in which the decision result is carried over until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed.
When the number of bets on the game value for a unit game is the maximum value, it is possible to display a combination of symbols corresponding to the specific combination and win the specific combination, and the game value for the unit game The first or second claim, wherein when the number of bets is the predetermined value, it is impossible to display the combination of the symbols corresponding to the specific combination and win the specific combination. Game machine.

Images